IRLF 


MMENSITY 

ij  ^  gpcpcpgpcpc^acpc^ 


GIFT  OF 


IMMENSITY 


"Immensity,  thou  dost  hold  all  that  In- 
finite can  place  within  thee.  But  there 
are  greater,  yea,  far  greater  places 
where  our  Father  gives  to  us  His 
higher  knowledge/* 


COPYRIGHTED  1920 
TEMPLE  OF  LIVING  THOUGHT 

4634  Fountain  Avenue 
LOS  ANCELES.  CALIFORNIA 


DEDICATION 


"To  the  Masters  of  the  Seventh  who, 
with  those  of  the  High  Heavens,  builded 
the  foundations  of  the  earth/' 

MARCUS 


PREFACE 


gLACE  thou,  O  Conscious  Thought  of  the 
Eternal,  within  this  I  have  given  thee,  thy 
grand,  great  message.  Long  have  we  who  are 
masters  of  the  Seventh  waited  for  the  word 
that  we  would  oft  be  given  the  right  to  place 
within  the  earth  the  knowledge  of  the  great- 
ness and  the  grandeur  of  Immensity.  Man 
cannot  reach  with  finite  mind  the  heights  that  we,  as 
spirit,  reach ;  neither  can  he  understand  the  glory  of  the 
Father. 

Immensity,  thou  dost  hold  all  things,  and  as  spirit 
moves  amidst  thy  glories,  we  find  many  things.  Why 
should  we  not,  as  we  have  gathered  up  this  knowledge, 
place  it  into  words  that  as  we  send  it  forth,  it  reaches 
those  who  need  it. 

I  say  to  thee,  O  mortal  man,  that  thou  shouldst  hold 
thyself  strong  enough  to  watch  with  us  the  movements 
within  Immensity.  None  have  ever  said  that  they  would 
wish  to  change  all  thy  beauties.  None  have  ever  said  that 
they  would  serve  aught  but  the  One  who  placed  thee 
where  thou  art. 


430931 


Unnumbered  are  thy  glories,  O  Immensity,  and  I  who 
come  have  striven  to  tell  thee  all  that  I  could  place  within 
the  few,  few  words  what  thou  couldst  understand. 

This  hath  been  my  mission  unto  thee,  O  Earth,  and  as 
this  knowledge  goeth  unto  many,  let  that  which  hath 
guided  me  go  with  thee. 

Within  the  folding  words  where  symbols  form  a  por- 
tion I  know  that  thou  wilt  bring  a  message  unto  those 
who  understand  the  symbols  best.  If  sweet  simplicity 
should  oft  be  needed  I  have  placed  it  there  for  those  who 
seek  it.  If  aught  should  be  thy  portion,  thou  shouldst 
trace  within  it  something  that  should  fill  thy  soul  with 
rest,  then  know  that  I  have  gladly  borne  from  out  the 
greatness  of  my  Father's  love  a  portion  for  thee. 

I  have  not  sought  to  tell  thee  all  that  is  therein  for 
others'  seeking,  but  I  have  taken  what  I  knew  thou 
wouldst  ofttimes  use. 

Let  the  quiet  peace  of  the  Divine  Light  be  thine,  O 
thou  who  readest  it,  and  as  we  walk  together  in  the 
thought,  remember  I  am  waiting  close  beside  the  won- 
drous rim  of  the  Eternal  Light  for  thee,  who  seek  to 
know  the  knowledge  I  have  brought.  Peace  be  the  word 
that  calls  us  always  close  within  the  comradeship  of  all 
mankind.  Use  always  the  great  charity  that  spirit  claims 
that  folds  its  wings  and  hovers  o'er  like  the  tenderness 
of  the  Almighty  Son,  and  everlasting  be  the  knowledge, 
and  when  worlds  have  moved  in  perfect  unison  with  the 
Creator's  thought,  then  thou  shalt  know  what  greatness 
dwells  within  Immensity. 


LESSON  I 


THE  EGYPT  OF  IMMENSITY 

MARCUS— January  15,  1920 

When  I  say  to  you  that  I  give  to  you  a  knowledge  of 
the  consciousness  of  Immensity  and  as  I  bring  it  close  as 
a  memory  of  your  own  personal  experience  as  spirit,  per- 
haps I  may  bring  in  thoughts  which  belong  and  hold  and 
unite  together  the  memory  of  earth  with  the  memory  of 
spirit  also.  Out  of  this  as  it  comes  to  you  as  a  knowledge, 
you  must  cease  as  man  to  make  comparisons,  for  when 
you  do  that  you  lose  the  power  of  penetration.  When 
I  say  this,  I  mean  the  power  of  the  penetration  of  the 
mind  which  you  possess.  We  have  stripped  it  of  all  that 
mentality  could  place  there  and  we  care  not  that  you 
should  take  the  knowledge  and  make  comparisons  from 
it,  for  no  man,  matters  not  who  he  is,  even  though  his 
intelligence,  according  to  the  laws  of  earth,  be  fine  and 
well  developed,  is  but  a  fraction  in  the  movement  of  spirit 
which  is  often  lost  sight  of  as  spirit,  closing  the  door  of 
human  life,  finds  no  more  anything  of  that  kind  within  its 
life  as  it  passes  from  place  to  place. 


Always  you,  I  and  Imhotep  form  a  wonderful  link  in 
the  consciousness  of  earth,  of  Egypt  and  even  of  Im- 
mensity. We  go  together,  as  it  were,  in  all  things;  and 
tonight  as  I  speak  with  you  I  would  that  thou  shouldst 

5 


know  that  it  was  not  always  needful  for  us  to  pass 
through  spirit  experience  and  then  transfer  it  to  earth,  for 
yet  within  earth  thou  canst  have  a  greater  consciousness 
with  spirit  than  thou  didst  have  before ;  time,  place,  age 
or  conditions  do  not  interfere  in  any  way. 

So  tonight  as  we  three  take  up  for  a  moment  our  wan- 
derings through  Immensity,  we  find  many  things  we  have 
never  known  before,  and  within  it  all  we  find  that  which 
is  beautiful,  that  which  gives  us  and  instructs  us  in  the 
laws  of  our  Father;  and  these  laws,  of  which  man  has 
such  a  dim  knowledge,  are  like  the  unfolding  of  a  won- 
derful bud  which  seems  to  have  no  center,  for  it  unfolds 
and  unfolds  unceasingly.  If  upon  each  petal  is  written  a 
law,  why  should  we  choose  to  have  our  Father  cease  the 
making  of  more  laws  for  us,  which  suffice  at  the  time ; 
yet  as  we  still  farther  penetrate  Immensity  we  find  therein 
many  laws  of  the  Father  which  we  had  never  known 
before. 

So  we  three  traveled  on  our  way,  if  so  thou  mightst 
say,  and  we  talked  together,  for  thou  must  go  to  earth. 
Imhotep  had  known  the  life  of  the  physical,  and  so  had  I, 
yet  we  held  no  shadow  of  it,  neither  did  we  carry  with 
us  into  this  consciousness  a  thought  of  it,  for  we  were 
like  children  who  were  seeking  and  gathering  the  flowers 
along  the  way;  some  of  them  were  so  bright  that  they 
seemed  to  hold  the  folding  of  the  Father's  law  which  said 
unto  spirit — Rejoice,  for  thou  art  My  children,  and  thou 
needst  have  no  shadow  or  care.  Others  might  speak 
sweetly  to  us  and  say — Thou  art  journeying  over  the 
highway  which  I  have  trodden  so  often  yet  each  glorious 
moment  is  full  of  many  things. 

Again  we  come  to  where  the  broad  valleys  of  Immens- 
ity hold  the  children  of  the  spirit,  they  who  are  created  by 
the  ones  who  have  the  right  to  claim  a  place  under  the 
Father's  condition,  and  if  I  say  unto  thee,  what  are  they 

6 


like? — They  are  brighter,  stronger,  truer  and  more  lik- 
ened unto  the  breath  of  the  Father  than  the  spirit  who 
comes  to  earth  seeking  strength  through  the  experience 
of  earth. 

Thou  wouldst  have  us  tarry  among  the  great  revolving 
motive  powers  of  forces,  and  Imhotep,  laughing  softly, 
said,  "Truly  thou  shouldst  have  stayed  within  the  Sev- 
enth Universe  with  its  blocks  and  bands,  zones  and  cir- 
cles." And  I  said  unto  thee,  "Yes,  gather  together  what 
thou  canst,  for  earth  will  close  and  hold  thee  silent  and 
will  hold  thy  spirit  under  the  strong  subjection  of  matter, 
man's  opinion  and  man's  thought.  And  long  shalt  thou 
dream,  O  thou  master  of  the  Seventh  Universe,  and  thy 
dreams  shall  not  be  likened  unto  the  dream  of  a  spirit, 
but  they  shall  be  filled  full  of  the  hardness  of  the  age  and 
time  and  place."  But  Imhotep  with  all  graciousness, 
said  unto  me :  "Marcus,  thou  shalt  not  be  the  one  who 
shall  cloud,  for  a  moment  our  journey  through  Immen- 
sity." And  thou,  knowing  not  as  spirit,  didst  say :  "Truly 
hast  thou  spoken,  and  I  will  go  my  way,  matters  not,  for 
hast  thou  not  seen  the  new  law  of  the  Father  which  we 
have  found,  which  says  unto  me :  'Thou  shalt  seek  and  in 
thy  seeking  thou  shalt  find  me.' '  Afterward  when  into 
Immensity  we  wandered,  I  knew  that  thou  didst  under- 
stand. But  thou  wert  not  satisfied  to  go  apace  until  we 
had  known  and  understood  more  of  the  forces  and  the 
motive  powers ;  and  thou  didst  read  many  of  the  knowl- 
edges they  held.  And  I  said  unto  thee :  One  force,  the 
force  of  subjection,  which  has  within  it  that  which  holds 
some  times  for  ages  upon  ages,  a  great  world,  a  universe 
or  a  zone,  holds  it  until  its  completion.  I  would  that  thou 
hadst  this  symbol  perfect.  What  need  had  it  to  be  held 
until  its  completion.  Once  more  as  if  that  same  force 
flashed  forth  its  symbol,  it  answered  us.  Even  yet,  if 
thou  dost  listen,  thou  canst  hear  it  say :  Yea,  verily,  none 


of  the  Father's  creations  are  imperfect  and  if  they  need 
time,  according  to  the  thought,  then  it  is  there.  Yet  we 
who  knew,  understood  it  was  not  time  that  it  needed,  it 
was  only  that  wonderful  intake  of  a  great  breath. 
"Come,"  I  said  unto  thee,  "let  us  go  our  way;  I  would 
that  thou  shouldst  see  and  understand  the  power  of  the 
great  silence  of  unity  wherein  are  written  the  great  words 
of  all  who  have  served,  in  the  knowledge  of  the  Father, 
which  has  not  been  revealed,  and  there  is  no  spoken  word 
which  can  reveal  it." 

We  went  into  the  heights,  we  followed  over  the  many 
pathways  which  spirit  had  made  for  us.  One  was  the 
consciousness  of  unity  and  it  was  so  perfect  that  it 
seemed  as  if  a  breath  would  disturb  its  perfection.  An- 
other, was  the  wonderful  movement  of  thought,  and  as 
we  walked  within  it  many  were  the  masters  who  claimed 
a  word  from  us.  And  O  how  sweet  it  was  as  we  walked 
therein !  Thought,  coming  from  the  Infinite,  filled  us 
completely,  it  wrapped  around  us  and  we  knew  not  how 
long  it  was  ere  we  found  ourselves  within  the  heights. 
Saith  thou  that  we  shall  travel  each  path?  No,  not  so, 
for  unity  and  thought  gave  us  a  completion  of  the  one 
law  which  thou  didst  understand.  And  when  we  had 
reached  the  heights  and  thou  didst  look  and  understand 
the  silence  of  Immensity,  it  was  at  first  as  if  thou  couldst 
hear  in  it  the  great,  thundrous  tones  of  the  movement  of 
worlds  and  earths  unborn.  Again  it  seemed  as  if  the 
silence  held  only  a  whisper  which  floated  ever  on  and  on 
and  on,  the  whisper  of  the  sweetness  of  the  love  of  spirit. 
Again  it  seemed  as  if  every  harmony  of  thought  floated 
and  changed  and  beat  and  throbbed  with  everything  that 
spirit  could  place  within  it.  Again  it  seemed  as  if  the 
footsteps  of  great  Gods  walked  within  it,  pacing  back  and 
forth  as  if  they  found  in  their  own  movement  a  conscious- 
ness of  that  silence.  Again  waves  upon  waves  floated 


upward  and  onward  wherein  thou  couldst  not  go,  and 
this  they  held  within  them — a  sob  of  a  higher  thought, 
a  vibration  of  something  that  spirit  had  placed  there  that 
it  might  move  and  move  and  move  ever.  Again  it  was 
as  if  some  perfect  form  had  given  unto  the  silence  itself 
that  it  might  not  be  lost.  And  we  listened  long  and  in  it 
all  we  found  not  this — that  spirit  when  it  went  to  earth 
should  lose  itself  within  the  silence  and  give  forth  no  im- 
pression, for  far  outside  of  that,  where  Immensity  flowed 
like  a  mighty  river,  we  caught  a  sight  of  the  impressions 
of  the  thought  of  the  Infinite.  As  yet  I  almost  seem  to 
feel  that  thou  art  with  me  and  art  viewing  this  river 
which  flowed  far,  far  westward.  Once  it  changed  and 
thou  didst  see  wave  upon  wave  within  it  and  they  spar- 
kled and  gleamed  and  had  white  foam  ever  upon  them, 
and  then  they  died  away  and  the  river  flowed  on,  golden 
in  its  light,  until  it  reached  close  to  the  edge  of  the  orbit 
of  the  earth,  and  then  thou  didst  say :  "Imhotep,  knowest 
thou  the  name  of  this  river?"  And  he  said:  "Some  have 
called  it  the  River  Styx ;  and  Egypt  called  it  the  Landing 
Place  of  the  Souls."  But  thou  as  thou  didst  look  upon 
the  silence,  said :  "It  is  the  River  of  Great  Thought. 
Seest  thou  its  waves  lift  themselves  like  the  power  of  the 
everlasting?  Then  dost  thou  not  see  it  grow  smooth  and 
golden  in  its  light  as  if  many  Holy  Masters  had  placed 
within  it  that  which  had  been  given  unto  them?" 

At  last  we  would  rest  us  for  a  while,  and  Imhotep 
said  unto  thee:  "I  would  give  thee  a  knowledge  of  Im- 
mensity." He  lifted  his  hands  and  lying  before  us  was  a 
green,  grassy  slope ;  within  it  were  many  a  golden  hearted 
blossom,  and  happy  children  passed,  and  left  us,  singing 
as  they  went.  Did  they  have  human  bodies?  Nay,  for 
they  were  the  children  of  the  spirit.  Imhotep  said  unto 
thee:  "I  would  that  thou  shouldst  rest  for  a  while,  and 
certainly  thou  shalt  see  as  thou  dost  rest  thyself."  He 


took  from  out  his  mantle  a  golden  cup  and  he  went  a 
little  while  from  the  place  wherein  we  rested,  and  when 
he  came  again  he  brought  to  thee  within  the  cup,  a  drink 
of  golden  wine,  and  thou  didst  laugh  and  say  unto  him : 
"Imhotep,  hast  thou  pressed  the  golden  grapes  of  sweet- 
ness to  make  for  me  a  drink  of  wine  ere  my  spirit  doth 
seek  strength  ?"  "Nay,"  he  said,  "the  masters  of  the  Sev- 
enth Universe  can  drink  of  the  golden  wine,  for  it  is  the 
height  of  knowledge,  great  and  supreme."  We  rested, 
and  I,  Marcus,  turned  aside  the  great  scroll  of  Immensity 
and  thou  didst  see.  Many  were  the  worlds  which  passed 
us,  each  bearing  within  itself  a  knowledge  of  whither  it 
should  go  and  what  it  should  take  with  it.  If  man  ques- 
tions thee,  thou  shalt  say:  Yea,  they  had  their  habita- 
tions and  they  who  inhabited  them  were  pure  and  spirit- 
ual ;  and  in  all  of  it  they  gave  homage  and  obedience  to 
the  Creator. 

Again,  I,  as  I  love  thee,  give  unto  thee  another  vision, 
and  rolling  again  the  scroll  of  Immensity,  thou  didst  see 
those  who  had  lived  within  the  Seventh  Universe.  Some 
of  them  dwelt  close  beside  thee,  yet  thou  didst  not  know 
how  close  they  were;  and  once  thou  didst  say:  "Let  us 
go  that  we  may  be  with  them" — for  great  were  the  halls 
and  wondrous  were  the  columns  which  supported  the 
towers  of  their  abiding  place ;  and  thou  didst  know  it  was 
strength  and  purity  and  love  which  dwelt  within  it.  I, 
Marcus,  said  unto  thee :  "Dost  thou  not  know  that  thou 
art  looking  toward  Egypt  where  you  and  I  have  lived?" 
And  Imhotep  said :  "I  go  there  soon.  Shall  I  take  with 
me  a  message?"  Then  thou  didst  lift  thy  hand  toward 
Immensity,  and  the  glory  of  many  suns  shone  before  our 
vision,  and  out  of  one  of  them  thou  didst  take  a  wondrous 
thought  and,  holding  it,  thou  didst  repeat  it  for  us.  Three 
were  the  symbols  which  thou  didst  have.  One  was  as  if 
thou  hadst  formed  a  circle.  The  other  was  a  bar  which 

10 


bent  not.  While  the  third  was  as  if  thou  hadst  placed 
ring  within  ring.  "See,"  thou  didst  say,  "the  first  is 
where  I  go  taking  with  me  the  holiness  of  a  great  thought 
yet  shall  it  be  within  a  circle,  confining  itself,  yet  never 
ceasing  in  its  movement.  The  second  is  that  I  shall 
always  hold  a  knowledge  of  that  which  I  place  within  the 
foundation  of  the  earth  unto  which  I  go.  The  third  is  that 
which  I  shall  claim  when  I  have  completed  all  things." 
Yet  a  little  while  and  we  rested.  Then  thou  didst  say 
unto  Imhotep:  "Imhotep,  thinkest  thou  that  we  shall 
ever  find  that  which  is  always  within  Immensity?"  And 
he  answered  thee :  "Yea,  thou  shalt  find  it,  but  until  the 
Father  calls  thee  unto  Him  thou  shalt  never  find  its  lim- 
itations." Then  thou  didst  say :  "Imhotep,  when  thou 
goest  unto  Egypt,  takest  thou  this  message  for  me — Say 
unto  Heldos  that  I  wait  and  when  all  is  complete  I  shall 
go  unto  her  into  the  Egypt  which  holds  all  things  for 
me."  It  grew  as  if  every  where  were  blue  sweet  banners 
and  one  came  unto  us  who  wore  a  white  robe  with  a 
golden  circlet  around  his  head.  Imhotep  knelt  and  bowed 
his  head ;  I  stood  apace  and  waited ;  but  thou  didst  stand 
as  man  to  man.  I  have  thought  of  thee  as  I  come  unto 
thee  within  earth,  that  Immensity  brought  thee  what  it 
brought  not  to  us.  And  I  waited  that  thy  spirit  might 
speak  unto  me  and  tell  me,  thou  who  art  a  master  of  the 
Seventh  Universe,  but  like  unto  the  silence,  thou  sayst 
naught.  But  he  who  came  unto  thee  spake  to  thee  in  the 
language  of  the  great  beyond — I  heard  it  never  before, 
yet  it  sounded  unto  me  as  if  there  was  a  wondrous  fall 
of  water,  and  thou  didst  listen  long  and  earnestly.  Then 
I  drew  closer  unto  both  of  you  and  I  heard  these  words : 
"Yea,  I  am  he  who  is  known  as  the  Messenger  of  Im- 
mensity ;  the  Father  hath  sent  me.  And  I  say  unto  thee 
that  thou,  in  the  great  Age  which  shall  be  called  Golden, 
shalt  give  unto  man  the  knowledge  of  Immensity,  yet  that 

11 


knowledge  shall  not  be  perfect  save  as  man  reads  it  with 
his  own  spirit." 

If  thou  dost  question  that  out  of  Immensity  shall  come 
that  which  spirit  brings  from  it,  I  say  unto  thee,  yea 
verily,  yet  spirit  takes  unto  it  that  which  is  multiplied, 
not  taken  away.  If  thou  dost  find  within  it  a  piece  of 
stone  carved  and  thou  dost  take  its  symbols  with  thee, 
even  though  thou  dost  place  them  as  a  knowledge  within 
the  earth,  thou  shalt  add  to  it  and  thou  shalt  return  it 
unto  Immensity  with  all  that  thou  shalt  gather  together 
with  it. 

Once  I  heard  thee  say  unto  the  spirit  of  that  master, 
"How  shall  I  know,  when  earth  holds  me,  the  meaning  of 
the  great  truths?"  "Thou  shalt  have  only  to  listen  and 
thou  shalt  hear  and  thou  shalt  know." 

He  went  his  way  leaving  with  thee  a  blessing  and  a 
truth.  Long  afterward  I  saw  thee  place  it  in  the  form  of 
a  carved  piece  of  ivory  within  the  Seventh  Universe. 
Thou  didst  talk  with  me  about  it  and  didst  say  it  was  per- 
fect and  that  thou  wouldst  use  it  some  time  when  we  shall 
have  builded  within  the  great  condition  of  Immensity  a 
Temple  unto  Truth.  I  asked  thee  not  what  was  there  but 
as  thou  didst  speak  with  me  as  we  passed  through  Im- 
mensity I  knew  that  thou  wert  studying  and  forming  for 
thyself  a  thought  thou  hast  ofttimes  held  since  thou  hast 
been  within  earth.  Once  thou  hadst  thought  that  thou 
hadst  fathomed  the  depth  of  it,  but  as  thou  didst  go  thy 
way  through  earth  it  melted  away,  leaving  thee  no  ex- 
planation. But  tonight  I  would  repeat  for  thee  that  thou 
mayst  gather  together  the  threads  of  memory  and  under- 
stand ;  for  truly  it  was  within  Immensity  that  thou  didst 
learn  it. 

It  was  when  we  were  near  what  is  known  as  the  great 
Waters  of  Knowledge  which  supply  Immensity  and  all 
created  things,  and  thou  didst  say  unto  me:  "Marcus, 

12 


seest  thou  the  threads  within  it?  This  is  that  which  shall 
hold  all  great  bodies  that  they  fall  not,  and  produce  within 
them  the  movement  outer  and  inner."  Since  then,  as 
physical  man,  thou  hast  said:  "O  yes  I  know,  this  is 
gravitation."  Yet  if  thou  wouldst  follow  back  and 
wouldst  think  when  thou  wert  with  us  within  Immensity, 
thou  canst  see  that  the  threads  of  knowledge,  pure,  whole- 
some and  Infinite,  are  what  produce  what  they  need — not 
their  movement,  not  the  pressure  of  an  atmospheric  con- 
dition. 

With  this  I  come  to  a  place  in  this  consciousness 
where  you  and  I  stood  a  moment  and  Imhotep  said  unto 
thee :  "I  go  unto  Egypt,  the  home  that  has  always  been 
the  home  of  the  masters,  and  I  shall  not  come  in  touch 
with  thee  until  thou  art  ready  for  Marcus."  Imhotep 
went  his  way,  and  only  you  and  I,  within  Immensity, 
held  a  place. 

The  comradeship  of  spirit  is  one  of  the  great  breaths 
of  the  Infinite.    Thou  didst  say  unto  me :    "Marcus,  wait- 
est  thou  a  little  while  until  I  become  accustomed  to  the 
earth ;"  and  I  bade  thee,  "Weary  not,  but  go  whereof  I 
told  thee."    Even  before  the  body  became  accustomed  to 
thy  spirit,  I  didst  say  unto  thee,  "Thou  canst  go,"  and  I 
showed  thee  whither  thou  couldst  travel  and  how.     I 
gave  thee  the  thought  of  the  measurement  of  limited 
spaces ;  I  taught  thee  the  things  that  men  do  upon  earth ; 
I  told  thee  that,  perhaps,  thou  wouldst  find  it  a  confusion, 
but  thou  couldst  go  a  little  at  a  time  until  thy  spirit 
became  accustomed  to  it  all.    Thou  didst  speak  unto  me 
and  say:     "Marcus,  thinkest  thou  I  have  chosen  aright, 
that  I  should  take  a  body  that  should  measure  Truth  as 
earth  holds  it?"    And  I  said  unto  thee,  "Thou  canst  do  no 
more  save  that  thou  dost  understand  the  many  symbols 
and  the  great  things  which  we  found  within  Immensity." 
Then  thou  didst  say  unto  me :    "Marcus,  thinkest  thou  I 

13 


can  go  to  earth  and  still  hold  that  which  belongs  unto 
my  spirit,  the  comradeship  of  many  masters?"  For  thou 
didst  turn  and  look  as  if  thou  wouldst  gather  together  all 
that  was  there  that  thou  mightst  bring  it  with  thee.  Then 
there  was  a  hush  and  I  was  alone.  I  saw  thee  passing 
through  Immensity,  touching  here  and  there  a  bright 
world,  looking  as  if  thou  wouldst  know  and  understand 
some  greater  thought.  I  watched  thee  go  thy  way.  Once 
I  saw  thee  stand  at  the  entrance  of  the  planet  Jupiter,  and 
the  Sons  of  Jupiter  greeted  thee.  Again  I  saw  thee  pass 
thy  way  and  the  great  gates  of  Leo  swung  open,  and,  for 
thee,  a  spirit,  Immensity  was  closed.  I  saw  again  the 
small  form  of  an  infant.  Thy  spirit  looked  upon  it  and 
seeing  the  soul  within,  thy  spirit  spoke  unto  it  and  the 
thought  of  Immensity  filled  it.  It  has  never  lost  it.  The 
years  rolled  by  and  once  more  I,  Marcus,  led  thee  to  the 
threshold  of  Immensity,  and  opening  its  portals,  breathed 
with  thee  its  atmosphere;  led  thee  to  its  ever  moving 
river  of  brightness,  its  great  heights,  its  wondrous  beauty 
and  the  Infinite  creations  within  it.  Once  more  with 
those  who  had  walked  within  Egypt  That  Was,  thou 
hast  had  thy  consciousness  of  Immensity. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Marcus  is  gorgeous  tonight.  He  wears  a  linen  tunic  and 
skirt.  Under  these  are  pure  white  silk  covers  on  his  limbs  down 
to  his  feet.  All  of  it  is  embroidered  in  gold;  perfectly  wonderful. 
The  pattern  is  so  peculiar.  There  are  wings  mingled  with  leaves; 
circles  with  leaves  within  them;  all  intermingled,  you  cannot  say 
you  can  separate  them. 

Q.     Why  are  you  robed  tonight  as  you  are? 

A.  I  have  been  home  in  the  Seventh  Universe,  for  I  knew 
there  were  thoughts  that  I  must  bring.  My  robe  is  that  which  is 
worn  by  the  masters  of  the  Seventh  Universe  when  they  gather 

14 


together  the  knowledge  of  Immensity  and  bring  it  to  earth.  Our 
robes  always  represent  our  work,  our  movement  and  our  thought. 
Mine  is  a  pure  thought,  a  thought  of  perfection.  The  gold  is  the 
strength  which  Immensity  holds;  while  the  figures  represent  all 
things  which  are  created  within  it. 

Marcus  carries  a  staff  on  the  top  of  which  is  a  point,  this 
flattens  out  like  a  triangle.  In  it  is  a  gold,  clear  yellow  stone  like 
a  topaz — and  as  if  you  were  looking  inside  the  stone,  there  is  a 
circle.  Marcus  says,  that  is  what  gave  me  the  power  to  penetrate 
or  pierce  the  atmospheric  conditions  of  the  earth  and  bring  into 
it  what  I  wished  tonight. 

Q.     Who  is  with  you  Marcus? 

A.  This  is  one  of  the  Brotherhood  of  the  Blue  and  he  comes 
that  he  may  hear  me  describe  to  you  the  great  highways  of 
Immensity,  for  he  wouldst  go  therein. 

Q.  Has  he  formed  any  part  or  portion  in  this  conscious- 
ness? 

A.  No,  but  in  gathering  up  this  knowledge,  which,  purely 
spiritual,  I  found  him  seeking,  and  I  said  unto  him — Comest 
thou  with  me,  it  will  give  thee  a  knowledge  of  impression  as 
thou  dost  watch  the  transference  of  spirit  thought  into  human 
words. 

Q.  Is  he  one  of  the  masters  who  will  come  to  earth  to  give 
a  knowledge? 

A.     Yea  verily. 

Q.  In  your  explanation  of  my  spirit  when  it  came  to  the 
physical,  to  work  its  way  through  to  become  conscious  of  this 
existence,  did  it  take  all  these  ten  years  to  prepare  for  this  con- 
dition of  consciousness? 

A.  If  you  will  read  this  lesson  you  will  find  I  have  explained 
it  to  you.  Marcus  says,  where  you  know  why  you  did  that,  is 
when  you  came  in  touch  with  the  master  of  Immensity,  in  spirit, 
and  in  that  which  I  gave  you,  is  why  you  remained  as  you  were, 
why  you  passed  through  that. 

Many  times  as  I  explain  these  things  to  you,  you  move 
slowly  toward  the  great  result,  but  it  is  because  you  are  forging 
a  great  truth — never  forget  that.  Remember,  I  have  told  you 
I  have  cleared  away  all  remnants  of  man's  mentality  and  most 
clearly  am  I  bringing  in  the  mentality  of  the  spirit  whose  depth 
and  height  are  not  measured. 

15 


Q.    Marcus,  were  you  a  scribe? 

A.  Yes,  in  a  way;  but  I  did  not  care  so  much  to  do  that  as 
others  did.  I  chose  to  hold  within  my  memory  the  great  things; 
but  I  never  repeat  them  that  they  might  form  a  word,  a  knowl- 
edge, unless  I  seek  out  the  great  symbols  and  know  whereof  I 
speak.  I  chose  to  make  what  I  would  do  as  the  laying  of  stones 
for  the  building  of  foundations,  that  they  might  have  only  my 
written  words,  not  carved  in  the  placing. 

Q.    What  is  this  nitrogen  composed  of? 

A.  This  nitrogen  within  Immensity  is  a  combination  of 
etheric  light,  a  fraction  of  created  principle  into  which  is  placed 
a  small  portion  of  Introzonic  fluid. 

Q.  What  is  there  in  the  atmosphere  of  our  earth  that  forms 
a  deposit  in  the  Units? 

A.  The  attraction  of  divine  light  to  the  aura  of  spirit,  which 
in  passing  through  the  earth  atmosphere  necessarily  reduces  to 
a  certain  extent  the  aura  of  spirit  and  in  that  reduction  it  leaves 
within  the  atmosphere  this  light,  in  turn  attracts  a  pure  quality  of 
the  earth's  thought.  The  result  of  which  will  eventually  become, 
when  the  unit  unfolds,  a  wonderful  revelation  to  spirit,  as  within 
the  unit  this  comingling  reaches  a  higher  degree  of  spiritual 
intelligence. 

Q.    What  is  the  Voltalic  force  composed  of? 

A.  It  has  three  movements  within  it.  One  is  known  as  the 
movement  of  Immensity  and  one  is  known  as  the  Nebula  of 
Finite  light.  The  third  and  last  is  known  as  pure  spirit  ether. 
Its  origin  is  that  which  exists  between  every  created  cycle. 

Q.     What  is  the  change  within  Immensity  at  the  present? 

A.  It  is  the  placing  of  planetary  bodies  for  planetary  spirit 
that  hath  progressed  beyond  the  life  of  a  planetary  atom.  The 
placing  of  the  solaric  system  for  the  formless  earth.  Also  the 
world  created  by  Mona  and  many  universes  that  shall  hold 
higher  development  for  the  use  of  Soul  Bodies. 

Q.  Introzonic  Waves,  shall  we  use  them  between  the 
planets  and  the  earth  for  communication? 

A.  Yes.  The  Introradio  Waves  will  be  used  for  the  planets 
nearer  the  earth.  Introzonic  Waves  can  be  used  for  longer  and 
I  should  say  immeasurable  distances. 

16 


Q.     What  is  Amalgamated  Fire? 

A.  In  immensity,  fire  is  called  the  Breath  of  Purification. 
Its  origin  is  within  the  great  intellectual  force,  and  is  known  as 
the  gift  of  the  Lord  God  Almighty  to  Immensity.  This  Amalga- 
mated Fire,  or  breath,  is  a  combination  of  the  breath  of  intellec- 
tuality within  immensity  with  the  breath  of  the  great  central 
force  which  gives  it  its  purity.  This  is  the  meaning  of  the  word 
Amalgamated,  placed  together,  unified,  known  as  a  strength  that 
can  never  be  lessened  and  a  pure  force  that,  can  never  be  de- 
stroyed. The  gift  then  to  Immensity,  is  Purity  and  Strength. 

Q.  What  does  iron,  copper,  silver,  gold,  lead,  aluminum 
represent? 

A.     Iron,  Truth. 

Copper,  Bondage  or  Binding. 

Silver,  Modification. 

Gold,  Strength. 

Lead,  Adjustment. 

Aluminum,  is  the  intelligence  of  majestic  penetration. 


17 


LESSON  II 

THREE  GREAT  DEGREES  OF 
IMMENSITY 

MARCUS— December  18,  1919 

There  are  three  great  degrees  in  the  measurement  of 
Immensity  that  always  must  be  needed  in  order  that  we 
may  place  the  closest  connection  possible,  and  that  we 
may  utilize  the  greatest  powers  that  all  this  which  I  am 
giving  you  may  become  plain,  not  only  for  yourself,  but 
for  others. 

Truly  it  is  said  of  those  who  strive  to  understand,  that 
in  the  quest  of  knowledge  simplicity  and  childish  faith 
form  the  greatest  thought  in  all  that  they  can  procure. 
I  sometimes  find  myself  wandering  from  place  to  place 
as  a  child  would,  looking  upon  first  one  thing  and  then 
the  other,  yet  I  must  stop  and  strive  to  place  it  simply  for 
myself  that  there  will  be  no  way  in  which  it  cannot  be 
understood. 

In  giving  you  the  thought  of  the  three  degrees  of 
Immensity  we  must  go  back  to  the  greatest  date  possible 
and  bring  it  within  the  mind  of  man.  That  date  as  near 
as  I  can  give  it  you  belonged  in  the  first  great  Age  of  the 
movement  of  Universes.  That  Age  was  called  by  those 
who  were  then  created  as  spirit  "The  Etheric  Age."  It 
was  the  highest  and  most  perfect  degree  for  the  move- 
ment of  Universes  that  has  ever  been  created  or  com- 
pleted. In  the  degree  of  measurement  it  holds  a  place 

18 


and  fills  a  place  for  many  millions  of  centuries.  It  was 
during  that  time  that  Immensity  was  placed  in  its  present 
condition. 

I  asked  that  I  might  formulate  a  thought  for  you,  and 
it  was  like  unto  this : — In  the  beginning,  if  such  may  be 
the  thought,  was  Immensity  created  as  it  is  at  the  pres- 
ent, or  was  it  subject  to  growth  and  the  power  of  new 
creations  being  added  to  it?  This  was  the  reply  given 
me  by  one  of  the  oldest  masters  in  the  Universe  of  Im- 
mensity. He  said  unto  me :  "In  this  great  Age  of  Ether 
alone  there  were  few  of  the  great  nebulae  in  existence. 
They  originated  through  the  movement  of  the  Unknown 
Lands,  as  it  has  been  told  me.  At  that  time  Immensity 
occupied  a  greater  space  than  it  would  be  possible  for 
you  to  explain,  but  it  has  grown  not  only  by  added  crea- 
tions, but  by  its  own  power  of  expansion." 

It  was  in  this  condition  that  he  gave  me  the  thought 
that  the  measurement  of  Immensity  was  in  cycles,  and  I 
asked  him  if  he  could  explain  to  me.  This  was  his  reply: 
"Certainly.  The  first  conscious  thought  of  masters  of 
Universes  has  come  through  the  wonderful  knowledge  of 
the  creative  cycles.  Also,  the  Infinite  used  this  in  the 
same  way  in  the  creation  of  Immensity,  and  Immensity 
was  measured  by  cycles  alone.  These  cycles,  however, 
were  very  large  and  occupied  a  tremendous  space,  as  far 
as  we  can  ever  understand  it.  It  was  during  this  time 
that  the  wonderful  point,  which  is  always  known  as  the 
Heart  of  Immensity,  was  placed.  It  runs  parallel  with  the 
great  center  point." 

I  listened  eagerly,  as  I  had  never  understood  the 
meaning  of  the  great  center  point.  He  took  me  within 
the  Universe  of  Immensity ;  he  showed  me  a  square  stone, 
light  in  color  and  very  highly  polished.  In  the  center 
of  it  was  a  tremendous  fountain  of  light.  It  did  not, 
however,  show  above  the  surface  of  the  rock.  He  said 

19 


to  me:  "I  wish  you  to  come  close  and  look  within  it." 
I  certainly  looked  and  my  astonishment,  I  assure  you, 
was  very  great.  Within  it  there  seemed  to  be  a  wonderful 
fluid,  golden  in  color,  in  the  center  of  which  was  a  blue 
flame.  The  flame  was  decidedly  pointed.  And  neither 
one  came  up  above  the  surface  of  the  stone,  yet  you  felt 
as  you  looked  upon  it  that  an  instant  and  it  would  over- 
flow with  the  amount  and  the  volume  which  seemed 
confined  within  this  space.  The  space  it  occupied,  I 
would  like  to  give  you  that  it  may  be  thoroughly  under- 
stood. The  stone  was  about  eighteen  feet  square;  the 
center  where  the  fluid  was,  was  about  seven  feet  in  diam- 
eter. I  looked  at  it  in  amazement  and  the  thought  that 
came  to  me  was  this — Truly  thou  art  a  great  life,  yet  thou 
holdeth  thyself  perfect. 

I  turned  to  the  master  and  I  spake  unto  him  and  said : 
"Wouldst  explain  this  to  me?"  "Yes,"  he  said,  "this  is 
what  is  known  as  the  center  of  Immensity.  It  corre- 
sponds to  the  Central  Force.  Watch  it  a  moment  and 
you  will  see."  I  looked  and  I  saw  a  line  within  the  flame, 
not  the  fluid ;  this  line  seemed  to  be  perfectly  straight  as 
if  it  were  drawn  taut.  I  looked  at  it  for  quite  a  few 
moments  and  I  shall  never  forget  the  feeling  that  came 
to  me,  even  as  spirit.  It  was  as  if  I  were  drawn  away 
from  myself,  drawn  into  a  degree  of  such  supreme 
thought  that  no  words  or  thoughts  of  mine  can  express 
it.  I  looked  at  it  long  and  wonderingly  and  there  came 
question  after  question,  and  each  one  seemed  to  be  an- 
swered the  moment  I  made  them.  I  will  repeat  a  few  to 
you  that  you  may  know  how  I  felt. 

One  question  was  this :  Am  I  near  enough  to  under- 
stand the  meaning  of  the  Central  Force?  Very  rapidly 
the  impression  seemed  to  come — Yes,  nearer  than  you 
have  ever  been  since  you  passed  from  out  the  Infinite's 
breath. 

20 


Another  question :  In  the  consciousness  of  spirit  can 
I  transpose  this  into  any  words  that  would  be  understood 
by  the  minds  of  men?  The  minds  of  men  are  not  meas- 
ured by  the  knowledge  of  words,  but  by  the  knowledge 
of  the  spirit  that  controls  them.  Use  whatever  words  you 
please,  make  them  simple  but  strong. 

Another  question :  How  close  is  this  Force  to  what 
we  call  the  Infinite  Force?  Instantly  it  seemed  as  if  for 
a  moment  that  everything  swayed  and  moved,  but  there 
was  no  clash.  If  I  could  explain  it  in  any  other  way  than 
this,  I  would  do  so.  If  you  have  ever  stood  where  the 
vibration  of  some  tremendous  gun  was  felt,  you  will  know 
what  it  is. 

I  watched  a  moment  until  I  felt  sure  that  I  could 
understand,  and  this  was  the  reply :  You  who  art  spirit 
shall  have  need  of  all  thy  strength,  yet  I  say  unto  thee 
that  that  which  produceth  the  Great  Central  Force  is 
Infinite. 

I  asked  a  very  simple  question,  yet  it  was  filled  full 
by  me  with  the  thought  of  love  and  obedience  to  our 
Father  Whom  we  call  Infinite.  Give  unto  me  that  which 
is  pure  and  holy  that  I  may  learn  of  Thee.  The  answer 
came :  Unto  all  whom  I  have  created  verily  I  give  all. 
I  was  satisfied  for  I  knew  that  the  master  had  given  me 
a  great  Truth. 

"Now,"  he  said,  "when  this  degree  is  followed  out  you 
find  coming  from  out  of  it  all  the  varied  conditions  of 
Universes  and  the  powers  they  possess."  As  near  as  I 
can  tell  you,  ours  was  the  first  Universe  to  occupy  the 
center  of  Immensity. 

"Come  with  me,"  he  said.  I  went  with  him  and  we 
seemed  to  enter  a  very  high  tower  and  he  showed  me  a 
wonderful  instrument.  It  was  small  and  delicate  and 
made  out  of  some  very  fine  material.  I  asked  him  if  he 
could  give  me  the  name  of  the  material.  "Yes,"  he  said, 

21 


"but  there  is  nothing  like  it  upon  the  face  of  the  earth 
that  you  can  make  any  comparison  with  regard  to  it.  It 
is  called  with  us,  lekuitus,  and  it  is  made  of  three  great 
portions  of  material/'  "This,"  he  said,  "is  the  second 
great  degree  of  measurement.  The  three  materials  within 
it  were  brought  to  us  from  beyond  the  rim  of  all  the  Uni- 
verses by  a  master."  They  were  separate.  One  was  con- 
fined within  a  large,  clear  stone  that  had  been  polished 
very  bright,  and  within  it  was  only  one  single  drop  of  the 
mineral.  He  did  not  give  me  the  name  of  this ;  but  he 
added  the  other  two.  One  was  confined  within  a  very 
small  parcel ;  the  parcel  was  in  the  shape  of  a  small  cube 
and  the  cube  was  made  of  ether.  I  asked  him  how  the 
ether  became  solidified  sufficiently  to  hold  whatever  metal 
it  was.  He  said,  "There  is  not  very  much  of  it."  There 
were  three  drops  of  this  and  he  called  it  Zonic  Uphia- 
dates.  These  Zonic  Uphiadates  were  of  three  different 
shades  of  white ;  one  was  a  pure  white,  one  was  greyish 
and  the  third  was  yellow.  The  three  minerals  he  brought 
me  were  confined  within  a  small,  coarse  rock.  "This,"  he 
said,  "is  a  mineral  that  is  called  laxious,"  and  it  resembles 
as  closely  as  I  can  explain  it  to  you,  what  is  known  within 
earth  as  soft  lead,  but  it  was  in  liquid  form.  We  placed 
all  three  of  these  together  and  it  created  what  you  see, 
unmolded,  however,  into  its  present  shape.  It  took  us  a 
long  time  to  formulate  this  into  this  instrument,  for  this 
reason,  that  when  it  was  placed  together  it  was  so  hard 
that  no  impression  for  a  long  time  could  be  made  upon  it. 
But  one  day  in  the  passing  of  one  of  the  newly  created 
Etheric  Zones,  we  found  there  was  a  vibration  or  current 
that  affected  our  metal,  making  it  pliable  to  produce  what 
we  wished  to  work  with  it.  Out  of  it  you  see  we  have 
made  this  form  of  an  instrument."  It  was  about  the  size 
of  a  twelve-inch  telescope,  round  at  one  end  and  square 
at  the  other.  The  size  of  it  around  was  not  over  four 

22 


inches.  It  was  placed  upon  a  revolving  wheel,  the  wheel 
placed  upon  a  standard.  The  whole  of  it  was  inserted 
into  a  very  solid  piece  of  heavy  rock,  that  there  be  nothing 
to  move  it  in  any  way.  "Now,"  he  said,  "I  will  explain 
to  you  the  power  of  this  instrument  for  the  measurement 
of  Immensity.  It  can  measure  as  far  and  as  long,  and  if 
you  wish  to  make  a  comparison,  Marcus,  you  can  say, 
as  many,  as  far  and  as  long  as  every  mentality  that  has 
existed  within  the  earth  to  which  you  are  taking  this 
knowledge.  If  they  were  placed  together  they  would  for- 
mulate many  thousands  and  millions  of  miles.  However, 
this  instrument  can  measure  any  height,  any  depth,  any 
circumference.  You  can  measure  the  smallest  particles  or 
the  largest  with  it.  If  we  desire  to  measure  the  accuracy 
of  the  movement  of  any  world  or  any  planet  or  any  zone, 
if  you  will  look  you  will  see  all  we  have  to  do  is  to  touch 
the  little  pivot  and  there  will  swing  out  a  tablet  upon 
which  you  will  find  any  record  about  which  you  may 
choose  to  know." 

I  looked  at  it  and  wondered  how  a  small  instrument 
could  do  all  this.  "Wait,"  he  said,  "I  will  let  you  measure 
the  distance  from  here  to  the  great  planet  Uranus  which 
is  outside  the  orbit  of  the  earth."  In  an  instant  there  was 
a  measurement  made.  I  saw  that  this  planet  occupied  a 
space  in  Immensity  that  was,  as  far  as  I  can  give  it  to 
you,  about  four  billion  miles  from  where  I  was.  This  is 
the  only  way  that  I  can  tell  you.  Its  circumference  was 
three  times  the  distance  it  was  from  us.  Upon  the  sur- 
face of  it  you  could  tell  to  a  minutia  exactly  where  the 
parallel  lines  run  round  it ;  how  many  vibrations  of  light 
it  had ;  how  many  zones ;  and  also  the  accuracy  with 
which  it  moved  WITH  Immensity  but  not  through  it.  In 
order  that  you  may  understand  this  I  asked  this  question : 
Why  does  it  move  WITH  Immensity  and  not  through  it? 
For  the  simple  reason  that  it  moves  within  Space ;  Space 

23 


is  within  Immensity.  There  is  quite  a  difference.  Few 
Universes  except  the  Bound  ones  are  within  Space.  All 
Universes  outside  of  them  (Bound  Universes)  are  in 
Immensity. 

Again  he  took  me  to  a  circular  room.  "This,"  he  said, 
"is  the  third  degree  of  our  measurement  of  Immensity." 
This  circular  room  had  suspended  from  the  center  of  it 
innumerable  fine  wires,  each  wire  was  attached  to  an  in- 
strument upon  the  floor.  These  instruments  were  square 
in  form  (about  twelve  inches  square).  Within  them  was 
something  that  you  would  have  said  looked  like  a  com- 
pass. It  was  made  entirely  of  glass,  the  whole  instru- 
ment. There  were  eighteen  needles  upon  the  face  of  each 
dial  within  these  instruments.  I  looked  at  all  of  them  and 
they  were  apparently  exactly  alike.  But  the  master  soon 
explained  to  me  that  there  was  not  one  of  them  like  the 
other.  "Now,"  he  said,  "I  want  to  show  you  the  measure- 
ment of  Immensity."  In  an  instant  the  whole  room  was 
in  a  blaze  of  the  most  vivid  fires  that  I  have  ever  ex- 
perienced, yet  these  fires  had  no  heat  within  them  and 
they  did  not  annoy  in  any  way,  the  vision  of  spirit.  They 
moved  in  very  peculiar  ways.  Each  one,  however,  fol- 
lowed out  its  own  line  upon  the  wires,  carrying  to  each 
instrument  the  record  of  its  measurement.  "These  wires," 
he  said,  "are  known  as  the  tabloid  wires.  They  follow 
out  in  every  direction  over  Immensity.  The  moment 
there  is  any  new  creation  they  record  it.  They  have  a  per- 
fect intelligence  of  their  own.  When  they  have  com- 
pleted that  record  upon  the  face  of  those  dials  I  will  let 
you  read  it." 

Are  those  wires  perfectly  stationary?  Yes.  Who 
placed  them  there?  They  who  were  created  for  the  pur- 
pose of  carrying  out  the  work.  They  come  to  the  Uni- 
verse of  Immensity  whenever  there  is  a  new  beginning  of 

24 


a  creation,  there  they  establish  these  dials;  then  they  go 
their  way,  and  when  they  return  they  have  a  perfect  rec- 
ord of  that  new  creation.  What  effect  does  this  have 
upon  a  new  creation  ?  It  does  not  have  any  effect  upon  it, 
it  only  records  it.  Why  does  the  room  seem  to  be  filled 
with  different  colored  flames?  "That,"  he  said,  "is  the 
effect  of  the  vibrations  of  the  tabloid  wires  upon  your 
vision  as  spirit.  Human  vision  could  not  come  in  con- 
tact with  it ;  neither  could  human  physical  atoms.  How- 
ever, you  have  had  a  wonderful  experience."  He  had 
scarcely  ceased  speaking  to  me  when  the  room  was  again 
perfectly  clear,  in  fact,  it  seemed  clearer  than  it  was  in 
the  beginning.  I  looked  at  the  instrument  nearest  myself, 
I  saw  that  the  needles  were  still  vibrating.  The  master 
smiled  and  said  they  had  not  finished  their  work.  How- 
ever, I  looked  at  another  one  and  saw  as  if  one  of  the 
needles  had  made  a  scarlet  line  across  the  face  of  the 
disc.  I  called  the  master's  attention  and  he  came  imme- 
diately. He  said :  "That  is  very  peculiar.  Let  us  study 
this  for  a  moment  from  the  other  instruments."  Out  of 
the  number  there  were  nine  that  had  the  same  scarlet 
thread  passing  over  it.  "I  think  I  understand,"  he  said, 
"it  is  because  there  has  been  a  new  creation  for  the  High 
Heavens.  This  is  a  record  of  it."  I  looked  into  the  face 
of  one  of  the  dials  and  I  thought  I  saw  a  form  or  small 
figure.  The  master  said,  in  explanation  to  me,  "Yes,  you 
are  perfectly  correct;  I  will  explain.  This  is  known  as 
the  dial  that  records  the  creation  within  Immensity  of 
that  portion  of  it  which  holds  elemental  life."  I  said, 
"Yes,  but  look  and  see,  there  seems  to  be  as  if  the  figure 
were  marred,  or  they  had  striven  to  erase  it."  He  looked 
at  it  and  in  reply  he  gave  me  this :  "I  certainly  can  ex- 
plain it  to  you,  for  the  elemental  life  within  Immensity  or 
in  any  form  that  it  may  occupy,  is  making  a  transition 
and  this  has  recorded  it." 

25 


Is  there  any  one  of  these  discs  that  records  anything 
with  regard  to  the  earth?  "Oh,  no,"  he  said,  "we  are  not 
measuring  the  earth;  we  are  measuring  Immensity." 
I  was  glad  of  his  information.  He  said  :  "But  I  want  you 
to  see  this  disc  which  we  consider  the  finest  of  them  all." 
I  looked  upon  it  and  I  saw  a  wonderful  flow  of  light  as 
if  wave  after  wave  of  the  light  passed  over  it  contin- 
uously. "That,"  he  said,  "is  the  record  of  the  measure- 
ment within  Immensity  that  holds  what  is  known  as  the 
inflow  of  spirit  life."  My  next  question  may  explain  to 
some  a  better  meaning  than  heretofore,  perhaps,  has  been 
given — Why  do  you  say  "the  inflow  of  spirit  life"?  "Be- 
cause there  is  no  outflow  to  spirit  life ;  it  is  always  an 
intake."  What  has  Immensity  to  do  with  this?  "It  has 
everything  to  do  with  it  because  the  first  great  currents 
of  the  life  of  spirit  were  set  in  motion  within  it  and  Im- 
mensity has  held  it  ever  since.  You  see,  in  the  measure- 
ment of  it,  it  has  taken  the  whole  face  of  the  chart.  In 
this  you  must  certainly  recognize  the  thought  that  it  is 
scarcely  possible  for  us  to  say  at  this  time  what  a  meas- 
urement of  this  kind  would  be." 

These  are  the  three  degrees  of  the  measurement  of  Im- 
mensity, and  in  this  thought  I  want  to  place  it  that  you 
may  know  that  the  measurement  of  immensity  is  not 
figurative,  as  man  would  place  it;  neither  is  there  a  line 
drawn  that  would  ultimately  reach  a  certain  point  and 
then  cease ;  neither  do  I  give  the  thought  of  the  measure- 
ment of  this  as  a  measurement,  but  because  I,  as  spirit, 
in  passing  through  it  here  and  there,  strive  to  measure  it, 
bring  it  within  a  certain  limited  compass  that  it  may  be 
transferred,  may  be  understood  and  that  there  may  be 
those  who,  as  they  pass  forth  from  earth  and  are  privi- 
leged, as  spirit,  to  enter  Immensity,  may  have  a  con- 
sciousness and  use  it. 

In  our  coming  to  the  earth  and  giving  all  this,  it  is 

26 


that  they  of  spirit  may  have  everyone  of  the  wonderful 
things  that  we  are  privileged  to  have.  Utilizing  these 
conditions  we  find  plenty  who  are  willing  to  assist  us; 
but  as  I  said  in  the  beginning,  the  simplicity  of  the 
thought  must  be  what  must  actuate  us  in  all  that  we  do 
or  say. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  Marcus,  you  speak  of  these  things  as  perfectly  real  and 
existing  in  form.  Is  there  any  word  you  can  use  that  would 
make  it  plainer  for  any  one? 

A.  There  are  very  few  things  that  I  can  make  any  plainer. 
They  exist  and  are  more  natural,  more  tangible,  can  be  used 
greater  and  with  more  accuracy  than  anything  within  the  earth. 
There  is  nothing  visionary,  vaporish,  undecided  or  indistinct, 
about  it.  The  knowledge  we  acquire  is  plain,  understandable 
and  filled  with  Truth.  No  more  can  be  said  by  myself  or  any 
spirit  who  comes  to  earth. 

Q.     Marcus,  what  was  the  blue  light? 

A.  I  wanted  you  to  understand  how  close  was  the  connec- 
tion between  the  highest  intellectual  force  and  the  present  words. 

I  have  a  little  instance  I  wish  to  give  you.  In  coming  in 
contact  with  masters  within  Immensity  I  often  find  them  asking 
questions  with  regard  to  the  conditions  of  your  earth,  as  many 
of  them  have  no  consciousness  of  your  earth  save  that  it  had 
been  created.  I  answer  as  best  as  I  can,  but  you  have  no  idea 
how  indistinct  the  earth  seems  while  I  am  in  their  environments. 
I  told  this  master  who  was  questioning  me,  however,  of  the 
buildings  within  the  earth  and  how  men  strive  to  make  them 
strong  and  solid.  I  know  that  he  was  amused  because  he 
showed  me  the  foundations  of  many  of  the  Universes  and  he  said 
to  me — They  have  existed  always;  the  earth  has  not. 

Q.  Marcus,  do  you  have  as  much  trouble  to  make  them  (of 
spirit)  understand  about  the  earth  as  we  have  trouble  to  under- 
stand about  spiritual  knowledge? 

A.  No  I  do  not;  they  seem  to  comprehend  exactly  many  of 
the  conditions  that  I  explained  because  they  are  very  responsive; 

27 


they  are  so  close  in  spirit  to  the  high  intellectual  forces,  which  is 
a  degree  of  consciousness,  that  spirit  absorbs  and  they  readily 
understand  as  I  explain  to  them.  But  usually  they  make  com- 
parisons as  I  have  given  you,  for  they  understand  the  greater 
Truths  that  man  does  not. 

Another  thing  he  told  me  was  this:  Yes,  he  said,  I  know 
what  you  are  explaining  but  then  you  know  the  earth  is  changing 
all  the  time,  it  has  never  come  to  its  proper  place.  Immensity 
and  the  Universes  all  have  always  been  there. 

So  you  see,  he  understands  perfectly.  But  few  of  them  are 
sufficiently  interested  (if  I  may  use  that  word)  to  arrange  any 
particular  amount  of  knowledge  of  the  earth  on  account  of  their 
feeling  that  it  is  wise  to  understand  when  it  is  really  what  it 
should  be,  not  in  its  changing  condition. 


28 


LESSON  III 

CONSCIOUSNESS  OF  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— October  9,  1919 

In  placing  all  things  for  you  as  I  do,  even  though  I 
may  separate  the  lessons  one  from  the  other,  I  will  event- 
ually arrange  them  that  they  are  in  complete  order.  But 
as  I  have  told  you  before,  each  one  is  to  be  given  accord- 
ing to  the  conditions  and  the  height  of  the  sensitization 
that  will  bring  about  a  perfect  record  of  them.  So  to- 
night I  will,  perhaps,  bring  in  a  thought  with  regard  to 
Immensity  that  will  not  necessarily  follow  your  last  les- 
son, but  will  fill  a  place  with  the  others  as  they  come  in. 

Immensity,  as  it  was  fractionized  (and  this  is  the  only 
word  that  fully  explains  the  thought),  in  that  fraction- 
ization  was  placed  finite  in  its  first  condition;  and  if  the 
question  comes  to  be  answered  it  can  easily  be  answered 
in  this  way — that  even  at  this  time  Immensity  held  an 
intellectual  consciousness  of  the  portion  for  which  finite 
was  created.  To  be  sure  the  atoms  that  afterwards  form- 
ulated what  you  call  your  earth,  had  not  become  con- 
scious of  the  full  meaning  of  finite.  And  even  at  the  pres- 
ent I  doubt  if  few  comprehend  the  meaning  of  the  word ; 
to  say  further,  also,  they  do  not  understand  the  thought 
of  its  creation. 

Finite,  however,  in  this  first  expression  of  itself,  held 
no  particular  intellectual  consciousness;  spirit  always 

29 


holds  it  from  the  time  it  passes  forth  even  as  breath  into 
ether  form.  Finite  was  placed  everywhere  within  Im- 
mensity that  it  eventually  might  become  imbued  with 
strength  to  be  able  to  comprehend  the  meaning  of  light 
and  its  coming  in  contact  later  on  with  Infinite  spirit,  and 
all  forces  that  are  imbued  with  Infinite  intelligence. 

Finite  had  many  forms  but  only  one  of  these  forms 
was  used  as  the  atoms  were  brought  together.  The  God 
of  the  Universe  chose  from  out  of  these  conditions  of 
finite  the  portions  best  able  to  bear  what  would  be  the 
strain  that  would  be  placed  upon  it  as  it  came  in  contact 
with  the  earth  in  its  creation  and  otherwise.  So  from  out 
of  Immensity  he  chose  the  finite  which  had  within  it 
strength.  This  will  give  you  a  wonderful  explanation 
with  regard  to  why  the  more  delicate  preception  of  intel- 
lect has  not  been  developed  within  the  ages  of  the  earth, 
only  what  is  known  to  us  as  the  crudest  ever  develops 
thru  finite  of  earth.  That  represented  the  strength  of  it 
as  it  was  taken  from  out  of  Immensity. 

There  are,  however,  other  forms  of  finite  which  are 
used  in  spirit  thought,  particularly  for  the  purpose  of 
coming  in  contact  with  forces  that  have  not  been  devel- 
oped up  to  their  highest  condition  intellectually.  We  will 
take,  for  an  example,  that  this  may  be  understood,  that 
the  forces  of  earth,  say,  the  vibratory  forces,  have  only 
been  developed  sufficiently  to  use  only  what  is  Crystal 
Zones  and  it  is  used  in  the  same  manner  correspond- 
ingly— as  an  example,  to  polishing  of  steel  to  its  highest 
tenure  or  strength,  as  all  Crystal  Zones  must  of  a  neces- 
sity be  in  such  a  highly  developed  condition  and  these 
finite  particles  act  as  a  polisher.  If  you  will  allow  me  a 
moment — for  Crystal  Zones  form  a  portion  of  Immen- 
sity, to  explain  them  to  you.  The  Crystal  Zones  hold  the 
highest  movement  possible  in  all  zonic  form  that  is 
within  Immensity.  And  the  first  expression  of  light  is 

30 


produced  thru  their  movement.    That  is  why  we  call  them 
"Crystal." 

Also,  these  Zones  are  protected  to  a  certain  extent  by 
these  finite  conditions,  acting  almost  as  an  aura.  I  would 
like  very  much  if  you  would  mentally  see  for  a  moment 
with  me,  what  these  Crystal  Zones  look  like.  Bringing 
it  into  what  physical  can  comprehend,  I  will  say  that  they 
are  like  innumerable  clear  portions  like  water,  or  frozen 
water,  and  within  them  you  will  see  as  if  they  were  being 
turned  in  the  most  minute  particles,  wheels  upon  wheels, 
or  circles  upon  circles.  Some  of  them  widen  in  the  move- 
ment and  when  they  do  this,  the  Zones  increase  in  size 
and  instantly  there  is  thrown  off  from  them  a  most  in- 
tense crystallized  light.  It  could  not  be  used,  however, 
if  these  particles  of  finite  did  not  form  an  aura,  for  as  it 
passes  thru  this  condition  it  is  modified.  If,  however, 
there  is  no  light  thrown  off,  it  is  always  known  to  us  that 
it  will  be  used  for  a  higher  creation,  and  that  it  will  be 
absorbed  thru  another  zonic  formation  that  moves  within 
the  crystal  and  absolutely  lifts  itself  when  it  reaches  this 
highest  degree  and  passes  upward  instead  of  outward. 

Another  condition  of  finite  is  what  is  used  to  reduce 
all  light  that  has  to  be  utilized  for  the  purpose  for  either 
illumined  worlds  or  earth,  or  worlds,  it  matters  not  where 
they  may  be  situated.  Many  of  them  who  are  known  as 
masters  utilize  finite  in  this  condition  for  the  transposi- 
tion of  messages  from  one  Universe  to  the  other. 

There  is  another  element  of  finite  that  is  used  to  pro- 
tect or  hold  anything  in  plant  life  and  keep  it  from  any 
decay  whatever. 

A  portion  of  these  finite  particles  has  been  used  by  the 
atoms  of  the  earth  in  certain  portions  and  they  have  crys- 
tallized many  plant  life  or  reduced  woods  or  formations 
of  rock  into  crystals  very  perfectly.  Beneath  the  sea 

31 


where  many  are  there  found  in  subterranean  caverns 
they  have  absolutely  created  most  wonderful  formations. 
They  will  not  stand,  however,  exposure  to  either  light  or 
air  as  far  as  your  earth  is  concerned.  There  are  places, 
however,  in  Immensity  where  you  will  see  wonderful 
displays  of  this,  but  the  ether  of  the  Immensity  protects 
rather  than  would  destroy  such  formations.  You  will 
sometimes  find  surrounding  the  Arctic  Zone  of  the  earth 
many  of  these  formations  and  once  in  a  while  the  physical 
sun  has  produced  a  reflection  of  it ;  but  as  Saturn's  atoms 
predominate  in  that  locality,  humanity,  through  the  phys- 
ical vision  only,  has  so  far  been  able  to  catch  a  wonderful 
display  of  color.  However,  within  the  tropical  zones 
these  finite  particles  have  been  able  to  develop  the  Mars 
atoms  to  a  very  high  degree.  In  that  you  will  find  they 
have  reduced  so  as  to  hold  within  the  seas  and  oceans 
very  highly  colored,  both  plant  life,  fish  life  and  molecule 
life.  There  are  many  forms  of  finite  that  are  never  out 
of  motion  but  moving  constantly,  form  what  is  known  as 
great  chains.  They,  however,  become  very  light  and  even 
in  the  atmosphere  of  Immensity,  become  too  light  to 
remain  upon  any  lower  strata  and  lift  themselves  and 
oftimes  formulate  into  cloud-like  substances  that  are 
absorbed  into  nebulae.  And  you  will  often  find  as  they 
are  within  these  nebulae,  highly  colored  golden  particles, 
often  spoken  of  by  masters,  as  golden  lights.  They,  how- 
ever, are  not  strong  enough  to  have  anything  to  do  with 
the  movements  of  the  nebulae. 

These  finite  conditions  are  always  known  within  the 
Spheres  as  that  portion  which  can  be  brought  together 
and  used  for  many  things  that  spirit  requires  for  decora- 
tion in  the  homes  and  also  the  temples  of  the  Spheres. 
I  would  like  to  say  to  you  with  regard  to  this,  that  these 
finite  particles  are  brought  from  many  of  the  Universes 
and  they  are  brought  and  left  within  the  Spheres  as  those 

32 


particular  Universes  pass  between  the  Spheres,  which 
oftimes  occurs. 

There  is  within  the  atmic  atom  a  small  portion  of 
finite  which  has  never  been  given  the  right  of  expression 
so  far.  If  it  had,  you  would  find  more  perfect  formations 
within  the  earth ;  you  would  also  find  in  human  form,  not 
one  single  deformity ;  for  it  holds  such  a  perfect  intellect 
and  knowledge  of  form  that  it  would  keep  everything 
perfectly  in  shape.  We  ofttimes  use  it  in  the  Spheres  in 
the  erection  of  great  buildings,  as  all  we  have  to  do  is  to 
use,  as  in  earth  we  used  a  level,  and  its  power  is  so  great 
that  it  produces  perfect  form  and  shape. 

In  this  I  am  giving  you  a  slight  knowledge  of  what  is 
known  as  finite  outside  of  what  ordinarily  is  called  by 
humanity  the  Finite  of  Earth. 

I  must  go  a  little  further  for  you  in  this  thought  of 
Immensity.  Consciousness,  in  Immensity,  forms  one  of 
the  greatest  powers  that  we  can  use  and  since  I  have 
undertaken  to  explain  these  things  I  find  myself  realizing 
a  fuller  thought  of  what  the  consciousness  in  Immensity 
represents.  First,  it  holds  always  that  which  can  be  pene- 
trated farther  and  farther  into,  yet  is  clear,  distinct  and 
simple  in  all  ways.  The  consciousness  of  Immensity 
itself  in  its  greatness,  in  its  grandeur,  is  beyond  my  words 
to  tell,  but  if  I  can  gather  together  here  and  there  and 
everywhere  first  one  consciousness,  one  thought,  one 
comprehension,  it  will  form  at  least  for  many  a  realization 
of  what  it  can  contain. 

Immensity  is  so  real  in  its  consciousness  that  I  ofttimes 
find  myself,  when  I  come  to  the  earth,  seeking  a  manner 
that  I  could  understand  human,  for  Immensity's  con- 
sciousness has  been  so  full  of  a  knowledge  to  me  that  the 
other  has  been  almost  as  if  it  were  a  blank. 

In  placing  this  for  others  I  shall  endeavor  to  reach  all 
those  who  may  choose  to  read  what  I  give. 

33 


I  found  in  the  consciousness  of  Immensity  many  who 
were  seeking  as  I  was  seeking,  many  who  were  striving 
to  understand  how  to  place  it  so  that  they  of  earth  would 
go  with  us  in  thought  and  be  able  to  read  and  understand 
a  few  of  these  things.  I  often  find  Immensity  like  a  won- 
derful city  full  of  everything.  There  are  other  times 
when  Immensity  is  one  great,  boundless  expanse  with 
scarcely  anything  except  the  great  creations  within  it. 
This  is  where  we  must  use  the  consciousness  of  Immen- 
sity to  understand  what  is  there.  It  is  out  of  Immensity 
where  everything  is  produced  that  is  needful  to  be  used 
by  spirit  for  many  millions  of  ages.  If  the  question 
should  be  asked — If  it  is  tangible,  if  it  is  real,  if  there  is 
a  solidity  about  it,  I  would  say  unto  you  that  within  Im- 
mensity there  is  more  reality,  more  solidity,  more  abso- 
lute consciousness  than  I  ever  found  within  the  earth. 
Immensity  holds  great  conditions  of  creation,  of  every- 
thing that  ever  the  mind  of  man  has  understood,  and  then 
you  may  add  many,  many  times  more  than  that.  The 
creation  of  electricity  alone  in  Immensity  is  marvelous 
in  its  extent  and,  if  the  realization  of  Immensity  still 
puzzles  the  human  mind,  what  must  be  the  search  of 
those  of  spirit  as  they  use  the  consciousness  of  Immensity 
to  investigate  how  it  is  created,  what  it  is  used  for,  what 
its  power  is  and  how  it  can  be  directed.  Another  great 
source  for  the  penetration  with  the  consciousness  of  Im- 
mensity is  the  creation  of  various  light  forces,  breath 
forces,  motion,  sound,  the  suppression  of  friction,  the  ele- 
ments by  which  great,  ponderous  bodies  can  be  elevated  ; 
the  etheric  Principle,  their  reduction  to  creation;  the 
creation  of  all  Circles,  Cycles ;  all  these  remain  as  a  por- 
tion of  the  consciousness  of  Immensity.  And  in  all  this 
you  will  find  millions  upon  millions  of  highly  developed 
spirits  who  are  using  the  finest  intellectuality  that  spirit 
can  develop. 

34 


Immensity  also  whereby  you  have  to  use  its  conscious- 
ness, is  where  symbols  are  created ;  the  manner  of  their 
creation  would  form  a  considerable  number  of  explana- 
tions as  these  symbols  are  so  multiplied  for  the  various 
uses  they  are  put  to.  For  within  Immensity  there  is  no 
sound  used  to  express  the  record  of  the  great  ages  that 
have  existed  in  Immensity.  This  is  produced  by  these 
wonderful  symbols  created  for  this  purpose. 

I  will  give  you  sometime  a  lesson  on  symbols  alone  as 
I  found  them. 

Motive  power  within  Immensity  is  one  of  the  great 
creations  and  without  the  consciousness  you  would  never 
be  able  to  understand  the  meaning  of  these  motive 
powers. 

Earth  has  only  once  in  a  while  exchanged  for  a  mo- 
ment one  motive  power  for  another,  usually  they  are  only 
a  repetition  of  a  beginning. 

In  summing  up  for  you  the  consciousness  of  Immen- 
sity, I  would  like  to  have  you  know  that  everything  that 
is  utilized  first  finds  itself  within  Immensity  for  the  pur- 
pose of  testing  its  perfection.  Before  the  earth  was, 
every  portion  that  composed  it  passed  through  this  test. 
Whether  it  could  sustain  itself,  whether  it  would  be  able 
to  bear  the  strain  put  upon  it,  whether  it  would  hold  to- 
gether, whether  the  combination  of  which  it  was  to  be 
created  out  of,  would,  in  other  words,  remain  as  it  should. 
Every  planet,  every  world,  every  Universe  passed 
through  immensity  and  absorbed  a  consciousness  of  it 
before  being  placed  in  its  position.  This,  to  be  sure,  to 
those  who  are  not  students,  will  read  as  a  dry,  insipid, 
perhaps,  word,  but  I  will  try  and  make  it  as  pleasant  as  I 
can,  and  if  I  should  say  to  you  that  once  in  a  while  Mar- 
cus finds  himself  stopping  and  studying  that  which  he 
comes  in  contact  with,  you  will  not  be  surprised,  as  I  am 
one  who  makes  everything  as  pleasant  as  I  can. 

35 


In  my  search  for  this  knowledge  for  you  I  came  in 
contact  with  a  very  old  spirit,  he  was  seeking  a  knowl- 
edge, how  to  combine  three  points  of  light  that  they  might 
form  an  octave  of  sound,  and  he  had  spent  (now  I  do  not 
want  you  to  laugh  about  this)  he  had  spent  four  million 
years  experimenting,  and  felt  as  if  he  had  accomplished 
considerable  in  this  length  of  time.  Humanity  feels  that 
if  they  cannot  accomplish  all  these  things  within  24  hours, 
they  will  leave  it  and  take  up  some  other  study. 


36 


LESSON  IV 

The  Intelligence  of  Divine  Light  within  Im- 
mensity and  the  Solaric  Systems 
Acceptance  of  it. 

MARCUS— March  4,  1920 

Coming  again  from  out  the  great  Immensity  that 
holds  both  thought  and  power,  I  strive  to  seek  and  find 
for  thee  that  which  will  give  to  all  a  conscious  thought. 
We  who  are  spirit  strive  to  intertwine  amidst  the  many 
thoughts  we  bring  that  which  is  high  and  holy. 

In  Immensity  we  find  what  earth  has  always  striven  to 
hold  and  yet  it  only  places  itself  around  about  the  earth, 
strengthening,  moving  and  holding  it  in  its  place.  In 
Immensity  in  many  of  the  extreme  outer  portions  of  it, 
you  will  find  zones  which  have  never  been  used.  When  I 
say  this  I  do  not  mean  that  they  are  idle  or  that  they  are 
left  there  without  being  utilized  for  any  purpose.  It  is 
the  placing  of  them  that  first  attracted  my  attention. 
They  lie  always  on  the  outer  condition  of  Immensity 
seemingly  forming  the  boundary  line  twixt  that  and  what 
should  enter  Immensity  if  Immensity  expanded  to  any 
greater  degree  than  what  it  is.  At  first  as  I  looked  upon 
these  zones  I  thought  they  were  as  others  I  had  seen,  but 
upon  closer  inspection  of  them  I  found  within  them  in- 
numerable movements  as  if  they  held  the  conscious 
thought  of  many  laws.  I  questioned  and  at  last  I  found 
one  who  seemed  to  be  able  to  give  me  a  thought  with 

37 


regard  to  them  which  I  could  place  in  some  form  for  you. 
In  explanation  of  this  (as  I  would  not  leave  it  otherwise) 
you  will  ofttimes  come  in  contact  with  those  within  Im- 
mensity who  hold  a  spirit-body  using  it  to  go  hither, 
thither  and  yonder,  yet  it  seems  not  to  be  their  place  to 
understand  the  things  that  you  may  be  searching  for,  and 
as  you  stop  and  exchange  your  thought  with  them,  you 
find  that  they  always  give  you  something.  This  one 
whom  I  asked  with  regard  to  these  zones  seemed  to  have 
understood  them  a  long  time,  yet  he  said  unto  me:  "I 
have  not,  as  yet,  been  able  to  explain  to  myself  the  full 
meaning  of  their  existence  here,  but  I  will  give  you  what 
I  know."  We  passed  toward  the  outer  edge  of  them,  and 
looking  within  I  saw  innumerable  zones  moving. 

Now  let  me  explain  to  you  how  a  zone  would  look. 
If  you  placed  a  large  movable  band  aglow  with  light 
and  had  it  moving  very  rapidly,  it  would  give  you  the 
conscious  thought  of  the  zone  in  movement.  If  the  zone 
is  quiet  there  is  never  a  perfect  quietness  within  it,  as  it  is 
constantly  quivering  and  moving  within  itself.  This  is 
because  of  the  life  element  that  is  within  it. 

These  particular  zones  with  the  zones  within  them, 
seem  to  have  the  power  of  expansion  and  contraction. 
This  master  told  me  that  as  he  gazed  upon  them  he  found 
many  great  movements  as  if  they  had  been  formed  and 
left  there  to  create  for  themselves  a  place.  This  to  me 
was  not  explained  at  that  time,  but  afterward  I  under- 
stood it ;  for  when  I  looked  upon  the  other  side  of  where 
these  zones  lay  I  then  realized  his  meaning,  for  they  were 
a  complete  creation  of  themselves,  and  in  them,  moving 
and  turning  perfectly  as  if  impelled  and  kept  in  that  per- 
fect movement  by  a  force  of  itself,  were  worlds  and  worlds 
and  worlds.  They  were  not  large,  they  were  quite  small. 
When  I  looked  and  saw  them  I  knew  what  the  master 
meant,  for  as  the  zones  moving  within  the  zones  reach 

38 


a  certain  point,  they  create  a  world,  then  these  worlds 
begin  to  grow,  as  you  would  say,  and  eventually  they 
themselves  create  their  own  expansion  and  pass  out  into 
Immensity. 

I  watched  some  of  them  as  they  moved  forth,  and 
turning  to  the  master,  I  said :  "Art  willing  to  tell  me  for 
what  purpose  they  have  been  created?"  "Yes,"  he  said, 
"it  is  for  the  purpose  of  giving  unto  that  which  has  never 
demanded  a  place,  something  to  use."  "What  has  never 
demanded  a  place?"  I  asked  of  him.  Then  turning  I  saw 
an  infinitude  of  form  which,  as  it  passed  me,  separated 
itself  into  many.  I  wanted  to  know  what  that  meant 
and  the  master  said  unto  me :  "Marcus,  the  infinitude  of 
form  is  what  is  known  in  Immensity  as  the  smallest  form 
that  can  hold  a  fraction  of  the  Infinite." 

"Why,"  I  said,  "is  a  fraction  of  the  Infinite  so  small?" 
"Come  with  me,"  he  said,  "I  would  that  thou  shouldst 
know." 

On  our  way  we  passed  many  masters ;  we  saw  the 
movements  of  those  worlds  as  they  expanded  and  the 
coming  unto  them  of  that  which  I  had  seen.  At  last  we 
entered  what  was  known  as  the  Great  Heavens  and  I, 
even  I,  stood  in  the  presence  of  him  who  is  the  Almighty. 
I  wish  I  could  explain  to  you  about  how  he  looked.  If  I 
should  say  that  he  was  man  I  would  have  to  forget  man's 
imperfections  of  form;  I  would  have  to  lay  aside  the 
doubts,  the  fears,  the  wonderful  condition  of  man,  and 
then  put  in  its  place  that  which  holds  majesty,  truth, 
benevolence  and  charity.  So  I  would  say  unto  thee  that 
although  it  was  form,  the  majesty  of  it  to  me  was  greater 
than  I  would  say  the  Gods  were ;  and  Gods,  to  man,  repre- 
sent man's  highest  ideal  as  far  as  his  mind  can  penetrate 
and  hold  the  thought.  The  master  spake  unto  him  and 
said :  "I  bring  unto  thee  one  who  seeks  a  knowledge  that 
he  may  give  it  unto  earth."  "Yea  verily,  many  are  they 

39 


who  are  bearing  a  burden  of  these  messages  to  earth ;  I 
speak  not  of  it  as  a  burden  on  account  of  its  weight,  be- 
cause to  them  it  is  a  burden  of  joyousness  and  love."  I 
looked  upon  him  and  it  seemed  as  if  that  which  was  my 
spirit  spake  unto  him  and  if  I  give  you  the  words,  they  are 
like  unto  this :  "Give  me  knowledge ;  give  me  wisdom ;  I 
would  have  it  that  I  should  give  it  unto  others."  He  came 
and  stood  beside  me.  "Wouldst  thou  know  that  which  is 
the  fraction  of  Infinitude?"  "Yea,  verily,"  I  answered 
him,  "I  would  know."  Gently  over  the  vibrations  of 
human  thought  do  I  strive  to  carry  these  words:  "Yea 
verily,  Marcus,  thy  Father  is  so  great  that  for  those  of  us 
even  whom  He  hath  created,  it  is  difficult  for  us  to  under- 
stand." I  knew  and  understood  more  than  he  felt  he  had 
conveyed  to  me  for  the  moment.  "The  Infinitude  of  this," 
he  said,  "is  where  He  uses  all  that  is  needful,  giving, 
separating  and  dividing,  that  the  beauty  of  it  and  the 
glory  of  it  may  be  for  all." 

I  say  unto  thee,  my  friend  and  comrade,  this  is  one  of 
the  glories  of  the  knowledge  that  thou  dost  gain  within 
the  Great  Heavens  to  know  that  these  worlds  as  they 
expand  hold  all  this.  To  us  as  spirit  we  gather  them  to- 
gether and  we  teach  them  and  love  them  as  the  Father 
dost  love  His  little  children.  They  hold  not  as  much  as 
ourselves  because  they  are  not  wholly  Infinite  spirit ;  only 
a  portion.  I  do  not  know  if  I  have  made  this  plain  for 
you,  but  if  it  is  not  it  is  because  to  me  most  of  it  was 
more  like  a  breath  of  the  Father  than  either  spoken  or 
thought  words  that  came. 

I  went  my  way.  I  sought  to  find  within  Immensity 
the  beginning  of  the  great  solaric  movement.  I  found 
there  were  three  of  them.  Far  to  the  extreme  portion 
of  Immensity  I  found  what  was  knoWn  as  the  etheric 
solaric  system.  It  was  not  being  utilized  except  by  great, 
immense  bodies  of  light.  They  were  uncolored  in  any 

40 


way  and  their  brilliancy  was  intense.  They  were  being 
prepared  that  they  might  follow  the  rim  of  Immensity  and 
give  to  all  lesser  bodies  of  light  more  intense  light. 

On  across  far  toward  the  East  I  found  another  solaric 
system.  It  was  like  a  wonderful  gem  in  its  brilliancy. 
I  asked  what  was  to  move  within  it,  and  one  who  was  a 
master  spake  unto  me  and  said :  "Do  you  not  know,  thou 
who  goest  unto  earth  and  hath  been  within  it,  that  there 
is  another  earth  that  must  come  into  the  solaric  system 
and  within  which  solaric  system  must  revolve  a  world  or 
an  earth  or  some  immense  body  of  light?"  For  a  moment 
I  listened  and  then  there  came  to  me  as  if  some  wondrous 
thought  was  born  that  they  of  us  who  had  known  the 
earth,  truly  were  glad  to  know,  that  that  which  followed 
worlds  would  have  a  place  when  it  had  completed  its 
wonderful  development.  This  solaric  system  had  within 
it  clusters  of  twenty-one  points  of  light.  There  were  no 
planets  within  it,  but  there  were  an  innumerable  number 
of  stars.  Those  stars  were  all  double-pointed,  which  gave 
them  a  beautiful  appearance.  The  master  who  was  there 
said  unto  me :  "They  have  never  been  used  within  any 
solaric  system  before  and  it  is  the  work  of  some  of  the 
greatest  masters,  to  whom  the  Father  hath  given  a  knowl- 
edge, who  have  created  these  to  light  this  system  and 
keep  it  in  perfect  form  for  the  entrance  of  the  Counter 
Earth.  I  looked  upon  it  and  I  knew  and  understood  that 
naught  in  the  Father's  thought  was  ever  left  out. 

This  brought  to  me  a  conscious  thought  of  my  own 
physical  existence,  and  I  say  unto  thee,  though  long  it  has 
been  since  I  held  a  body,  still  in  the  consciousness  of 
spirit  have  I  watched  many  things  within  the  earth.  I 
have  seen  it  changing,  I  have  seen  many  races  lift  them- 
selves high  above  others;  I  have  seen  them,  as  it  were, 
fade  away  and  others  taking  their  place.  But  in  this 
viewing  of  Immensity  I  realized  most  plainly  that  this 

41 


would  never  rise  or  fall,  it  always  would  hold  its  place, 
keeping  it  as  perfect  as  when  first  it  was  created. 

Sometimes  as  I  come  in  touch  with  masters  they  ques- 
tion me,  for  they  know  I  am  seeking  knowledge  and 
always  that  which  belongs  to  earth,  and  they  who  are 
earth-created-spirits  have  for  me  a  deeper  tenderness  than 
others.  Why?  might  be  a  question  that  I  could  answer, 
and  if  I  answered  it  it  would  be  because  sometime  we  will 
all  be  together  in  the  great  formless  existence.  This  drew 
me  close  to  the  solaric  system  for  the  earth.  Let  me  place 
it  for  thee,  let  me  make  it  plain. 

It  is  ever  moving,  consciously  moving,  drawing  within 
itself  from  every  portion  of  Immensity  with  every  move- 
ment that  it  makes,  something  that  seems  to  illumine  it, 
something  that  seems  to  fill  it  full,  yet  it  is  never  filled. 
If  they  who  read  this  feel  as  if  there  would  be  a  cessa- 
tion, I  say,  nay  not  so.  Ever  above  and  moving  in  the 
midst  of  it  is  the  great  divine  light.  What  is  it  that  gives 
it  its  intelligence?  What  is  it  that  every  portion  that 
enters  this  solaric  system  answers?  It  is  not  form ;  it  has 
no  body,  yet  if  thou  dost  come  in  contact  with  it  thou 
dost  feel  as  if  it  had  given  thee  a  blessing.  As  the  bodies 
of  light  move  within  this  system,  ofttimes  there  seems  to 
be  a  need  of  it — it  is  there — an  ever  presence,  lighting  up 
and  filling  all  space  around  it  with  a  glory  that  is  inde- 
scribable. Here  and  there  and  everywhere  you  will  find 
spirit  form  coming  unto  it  reaching  their  hands  into  it, 
asking  not,  for  it  gives  without  asking. 

Has  the  trembling  consciousness  of  man  sought  to 
understand  this?  Or  have  they  stood  and  waited  that  the 
Father  should  lead  their  spirit  out  and  then  give  them  an 
understanding?  Not  so,  I,  Marcus,  who  loves  to  bring 
unto  thee  this,  say  unto  thee,  nay,  the  Father  leadeth  not ; 
it  is  those  whom  He  sends  to  lead  them. 

42 


Once  more  as  I  followed  I  watched  this  moving,  ever 
moving  in  such  perfect  harmony,  and  it  seemed  once  in  a 
while  as  if  I  would  have  to  leave  it  and  go  my  way,  for  I 
knew  that  I  could  not  tell  it  all  unto  thee.  But  as  I  waited 
a  moment  there  came  unto  me  this  thought — if  thou  art  to 
find  a  way,  truly  the  Father  will  give  it  unto  thee — and 
again  I  felt  the  presence  of  the  divine  light.  I  shut  my 
spirit  close  within  itself  and  when  I  did  so  it  seemed  as 
if  all  space  was  filled,  filled  with  that  which  was  spirit. 
Peace  was  everywhere.  Then  there  came  amidst  them 
they  who  were  known  as  the  Angels  of  Divinity.  Hath 
there  been  within  the  vision  of  spirit  such  a  sight  before? 
I  think  me  not,  and  yet  I  say  unto  thee  it  is  there  within 
Immensity,  within  the  solaric  system  that  is  holding  for 
the  earth  all  that  is  within  that  which  the  Father  hath 
created. 

They  moved  amidst  us,  glorified  they  are,  and  holy 
and  divine.  What  spake  they  unto  us  ?  I  cannot  tell  thee, 
this  is  one  of  the  things  that  must  wait  for  those  who 
come  into  this  place  with  the  new  earth.  Many  masters 
greeted  me  as  I  passed  within  it,  and  if  some  question  thee 
and  ask  of  thee — what  was  the  air  around  us? — say  unto 
them  it  was  pure.  If  they  say  unto  thee — upon  what  did 
they  tread  ? — I  say  unto  thee  it  was  that  which  was  made 
perfect  through  the  Law  of  Holiness.  If  any  one  should 
say  unto  thee — do  they  claim  a  place  as  far  as  form  is? — 
Yea,  I  say  unto  thee,  yet  the  form  is  not  likened  unto 
that  which  any  one  has  ever  seen.  It  is  like  the  presence 
of  divine  light.  It  answers  them ;  it  speaks  unto  them ;  it 
gives  them  knowledge;  it  blesses  them;  yet  thou  canst 
not  say  it  is  form. 

I  stood  amidst  those  who  were  using  the  wonderful 
knowledge  that  is  drawing  from  out  of  the  orbit  of  the 
earth  those  great  bodies  of  which  man  has  never  known. 
What  are  they  for?  They  said  unto  me,  they  were  created 

43 


and  placed  within  the  orbit  of  the  earth  that  when  this 
transition  was  to  be  made,  they  would  have  the  power  of 
sustaining  all  matter  form  with  a  substance  until  it  should 
become  only  spirit. 

I  looked  upon  them  and  I  saw  within  them  as  if  they 
were  like  units  that  had  been  unfolded,  then  I  knew 
wherein  the  first  condition  of  spiritualized  matter  would 
rest.  I  saw  that  it  was  here  where  it  would  learn  the  con- 
sciousness of  its  own  perfect  existence.  I  asked  many 
who  were  there  and  they  said  :  "Seest  thou  that  that  which 
has  been  known  as  the  rim  of  the  orbit  has  disappeared?" 
As  I  looked  I  saw  fragments,  and  in  your  words  it  would 
be  like  this — fragments  of  heavy  vapor.  Again  I  looked 
upon  it  and  I  saw  it  change,  it  became  a  brilliant  golden 
color;  then  I  saw  it  utilized  by  those  who  formed  it  into 
golden  circles.  Again  it  was  lifted  as  if  not  yet  had  it 
reached  the  height  for  which  it  was  intended.  The  rim 
of  the  orbit  of  your  earth,  even  that,  is  placed  in  a  higher 
degree.  Then  I  saw  it  in  pure  golden  cycles.  What  did 
they  hold?  They  held  the  consciousness  of  perfect  ma- 
terial and  in  and  through  these  cycles  would  they  pene- 
trate seeking  an  expression  that  would  become  a  form  in 
perfect  thought,  movement  and  being. 

For  a  moment  let  me  lay  aside  these  thoughts  that  to 
many  will  seem  almost  beyond  their  understanding,  and 
I  will  take  up  the  thought  of  the  masters  entering  within 
the  orbit  of  the  earth,  a  goodly  company  from  every  Uni- 
verse, from  Immensity,  from  Space,  Heavens  and  even  the 
rim  of  the  Universes.  Man  does  not  count  as  spirit 
reckons,  but  in  this  company  we  went  in  groups  as  if  we 
understood  our  message  and  the  messengers.  Some 
spoke  of  the  many  things  that  earth  held  as  far  as  the 
spirit  of  all  things  was  concerned.  Others  spoke  of  the 
advancement  that  the  earth  was  making.  Some  had  not 
come  as  close  before  and  looked  upon  it  as  you  would  look 


if  you  entered  some  new  condition.  One  seemed  to  be  a 
spirit  that  had  come  from  great  heights;  his  form  was 
majestic,  his  countenance  shone,  and  I  was  attracted  to 
him  feeling  that  he  could  give  me  a  great  knowledge.  We 
passed  through  many  of  the  conditions  within  the  orbit 
and  at  last  came  to  the  nearest  point  where  are  collected 
what  you  call  the  vapors  of  the  earth.  Then  I  spake  unto 
him  and  said :  "With  all  thy  knowledge  canst  thou  give 
me  a  thought  as  to  why  this  has  to  be  removed?"  Then 
he  said  to  me :  "Marcus,  how  didst  thou  know  it  was  to  be 
removed?"  Then  in  answer  I  replied :  "Because  thou  hast 
thought  so  loud  that  I  heard  thee  as  I  came  close  unto  it." 
I  do  not  know  if  he  and  I  spake  thus  exactly,  but  I 
have  given  you  that  you  may  understand :  "Yes,  Marcus, 
it  is  my  work  to  remove  that."  Again  I  questioned, 
"Why  does  it  have  to  be  removed?"  Then  he  said,  "I 
want  you  to  look  and  see."  I  did  so  and  I  saw  those  three 
great  physical  suns  moving  as  they  had  always  moved,  yet 
I  know  that  much  of  that  which  had  lain  between  it  and 
this  last  condition  nearest  the  earth  had  been  removed. 
The  vapor  grew  very  dense,  thick  and  heavy.  The  mas- 
ter said:  "Do  you  not  see  that  this  great  modifier  is  with- 
out assistance  from  the  physical  suns?"  I  looked  again 
and  I  saw  rising  from  the  crust  of  the  earth  a  full  light. 
"That,"  he  said,  "is  the  magnetism  of  the  earth  respond- 
ing to  the  needs  of  this  condition.  Watch  it  a  moment." 
I  saw  it  form  itself  like  small  wedges,  penetrating  this 
vapor  and  then  I  realized  what  it  was  for.  If  human 
bodies  were  to  penetrate  it,  they  would  find  it  extremely 
cold.  The  action  upon  it  from  the  reverse  side  produces 
cold ;  while  the  passing  of  it  from  the  earth  into  it  will 
produce  warmth.  "This,"  he  said,  "is  the  method  by 
which  it  will  be  removed,  then  physical  bodies  that  have 
not  become  sensitive  enough  to  bear  the  transition  can 

45 


come  into  this  and  it  will  sensitize  and  prepare  them  for 
the  last  transition." 

He  did  not  enter  any  farther,  but  returned  and  went 
his  way. 

One  of  the  masters  who  was  with  us  said:  "I  have 
tried  very  hard  to  understand  him  but  I  could  not,  he 
seemed  only  to  think,  while  I  could  not  understand." 
This  may  give  you  some  idea  about  many  things. 

Again  I  watched  and  I  saw  the  lessening  of  the  dis- 
tance between  the  earth  and  the  solaric  system,  and  it  was 
as  if  it  only  moved  slowly  on  account  of  the  weight  of 
the  earth,  as  yet.  I  watched  it  and  I  saw  the  earth  light- 
ening as  if  it  was  being  made  more  like  the  etheric  con- 
dition that  the  new  solaric  system  held.  As  I  watched  it 
I  saw  the  inner  portions  of  it  becoming,  as  it  were,  like 
the  outer  portions,  and  when  I  asked  I  was  given  this 
knowledge,  that  never  before  had  that  which  was  within 
the  earth  been  in  the  condition  it  was,  as  far  as  its  con- 
scious knowledge  was  concerned.  It  may  be  of  interest 
that  I  tell  you  this — there  are  many  strata  within  the 
earth  which  are  moving  so  rapidly  that,  unless  you  had  a 
spirit's  full  knowledge,  it  would  make  you  think  as  you 
looked  upon  them,  as  if  it  would  revolve  the  inner  por- 
tion to  the  outer  more  rapidly  than  the  earth  would  lift 
itself.  But  such  is  the  case.  These  inner  portions  revolv- 
ing so  rapidly  are  what  lightens  the  earth.  The  magnetic 
fractions  of  the  earth,  the  inner  earth,  are  scintillating  like 
innumerable  sparks  and  they,  taking  upon  themselves 
the  consciousness  of  the  movement  of  the  earth,  are  add- 
ing to  its  power  of  doing  away  with  weight,  as  far  as  the 
earth  is  concerned. 

As  I  came  very  close  to  the  earth  I  found  many  who 
are  lifting  themselves  up  and  asking  many  questions,  and 
if  I  say  unto  thee  that  those  questions  look  like  fragments 
of  clouds,  you  would  not  be  surprised.  Some  of  them 

46 


were  tinged  with  different  colorings  taken  from  the  auras 
of  the  bodies  through  which  they  had  passed.  I  won- 
dered how  they  would  be  utilized  and  then  I  saw  them 
passing  through,  on  and  on ;  then  I  knew  they  would  go 
into  the  Universe  of  Thought,  there  to  await  the  utili- 
zation of  them  or  the  placing  of  them  until  they  could 
become  worthy  of  use. 

Now  I  have  a  few  things  about  which  to  speak  to  you. 
I  want  you  to  listen  to  the  results  and  the  work  of  many 
spirits  who  have  had  a  place  within  the  earth.  As  you 
know,  it  has  been  said  that  they  are  establishing  here  and 
there  and  everywhere  great  stations  through  which  spirit 
communication  would  be  sent  pure  and  clear  and  plain ; 
like  a  breath  of  wonderful  intelligence  it  is  coming  to  the 
earth  and  you  will  not  only  find  it  giving  relief  to  many, 
but  it  is  producing  a  higher  use  of  much  that  has  been 
within  the  atmosphere  of  earth  and  never  utilized  before. 
It  will  do  away  with  much  of  the  heavy,  ponderous  ele- 
ments as  you  know  were  known  to  you  some  time  ago. 
You  will  find  the  weight  of  everything  is  being  reduced  as 
if  there  should  be  what  is  known  as  a  finer  texture,  but 
not  so  much  heaviness.  This  eventually  will  give  way  to 
heaviness  until  it  will  become  a  lightness ;  and  this  will 
give  man  the  power  of  using  many  things  that  are  in  the 
atmosphere  around  him  ;  the  brain  of  man  becoming  more 
sensitive,  is  realizing  the  power  of  receiving  this.  It  will 
not  be  confined  to  any  particular  class  of  men  or  women,, 
but  here  and  there  and  everywhere  it  will  suddenly  burst 
forth  like  a  wonderful  light.  Through  this  you  will  find 
that  the  earth  will  be  in  more  perfect  unison  one  with  the 
other,  and  I  am  sure  they  will  find  themselves  more 
enrappo  with  the  more  divine  and  holier  thoughts  that  are 
everywhere  around  them. 


47 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

(What  are  you  going  to  call  this  lesson?  Answer: 
The  Intelligence  of  Divine  Light  within  Immensity  and 
the  Solaric  System's  acceptance  of  it.) 

Q.     These  cloud-like  forms — are  they  thought  forms? 

A.  No,  altogether  different.  When  they  ask  a  question  do 
they  not  have  to  place  a  thought  for  it?  No;  do  you  not  know 
that  when  you  verbally  ask  a  question  it  is  there?  The  thought 
was  back  of  it;  but  the  only  word  I  can  use  is,  that  you  have 
expressed  it,  yet  not  voiced  it. 

Q.  When  they  enter  the  Universe  of  Thought,  what  be- 
comes of  them? 

A.  They  are  placed  where  they  can  be  made  into  something 
greater.  It  is  like  you  take  three  elements  and  place  them 
together,  you  have  the  elements  but  you  have  something  greater 
out  of  them.  For  within  the  Universe  of  Thought  are  only  the 
Great  Thoughts.  But  these  fractions  can  be  made  into  that. 
Weld  them  together?  Yes. 

I  love  to  have  you  reason  out  because  I  know  that  many 
times  as  you  do  that  you  silently  voice  words  which  I  can  use 
sometimes. 

Q.     Marcus,  why  are  you  wearing  your  brown  robe  tonight? 
A.     I  waited  long  enough  within  Immensity  to  build  a  circle 
and  so  I  wore  my  workman's  clothes. 

Q.     What  was  it  Marcus? 

A.     The  foundation  for  a  Temple. 

Q.     What  is  the  Temple  for? 

A.  It  is  to  hold  a  simple  service,  for  there  are  those  whose 
souls  must  have  a  place  when  first  they  reach  a  place  that  is  pre- 
pared within  Immensity  that  Holy  Spirit  has  as  its  great  portion. 
It  has  never  held  a  Temple  yet,  but  now  the  foundation  is  begun. 

I  often  wear  these  robes  because  when  I  go  unto  the  Uni- 
verse I  find  many  like  myself,  always  preparing,  always  placing. 


48 


LESSON  V 

THE  USE  OF  IMMENSITY. 
WHAT  IS  WITHIN  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— August  7,  1919 

The  use  of  Immensity  is  one  of  the  greatest  conditions 
possible  for  the  mind  of  man  to  encompass  and  all  forces 
originate  (ing)  in  Immensity  carry  with  them  an  equal 
balance;  if  the  earth  utilizes  these  forces  in  perfect  har- 
mony, even  though  their  knowledge  is  not  given  at  any 
one  time,  eventually  the  spirit  is  able  to  absolutely 
acquire  a  perfect  knowledge  of  it.  One  of  the  great  rea- 
sons why  Immensity  is  called  by  such  a  name  is  that  it 
may  be  adequate  for  all  creation  that  has  no  cessation. 

The  first  great  portion  of  Immensity  is  left  for  the  pur- 
pose of  holding  creations  that  are  to  be  utilized  immedi- 
ately. The  rest  of  Immensity  is  divided,  as  it  were,  by 
circles  of  universes,  unknown  lands  and  heavens.  This  is 
where  it  is  known  as  the  rim  of  Immensity,  beyond  which 
it  would  be  impossible  to  penetrate  and  express  unto  man 
a  thought  of  its  greatness,  for  the  mind  of  man  adapts 
itself  in  exemplifying  and  comparing  greatness  by  what 
he  sees  around  him. 

One  of  the  great  thoughts  contained  in  Immensity  is 
its  perfect  unity  with  Infinite  sources  and  causes.  The 
first  problem  spirit  encounters  as  it  strives  to  enter  Im- 
mensity is  the  power  of  passing  through  what  is  known 
as  that  portion  of  Immensity  which  holds  Infinite  incep- 

49 


tion  and  there  are  few,  even  of  the  masters,  who  have 
been  able  to  penetrate  this  condition.  There  are  portions 
of  Immensity  that  hold  what  is  called  the  abstract  of  finite 
equalization.  This  is  available  for  masters  of  high  degree 
and  is  always  used  by  masters  who  have  a  mastership  of 
more  than  two  universes  and  one  of  earth.  Other  por- 
tions of  Immensity  hold  what  is  known  as  the  powers  or 
the  balancing  of  great  and  immense  conditions,  whether  it 
be  of  ether  or  fluidic  substance. 

You  will  find  in  Immensity  what  is  called  the  Intellec- 
tual Circles,  not  the  intelligence  that  man  holds  that  re- 
peats over  many  times  what  is  given  him,  but  the  intelli- 
gence that  is  used  by  all  conditions  of  life  that  is  imbued 
with  Infinite,  whether  it  would  be  in  small  or  large  pro- 
portions. 

Within  the  Immensity  that  holds  the  heavens  there 
are  many  great  bodies  that  are  termed  Seas  or  Oceanic 
Forces.  These  seas  are  not  made  of  water,  but  ether,  and 
hold  great  quantities  of  what  we  call  embodied  light.  If  it 
is  fluidic  matter,  it  is  confined  to  what  is  known  as  Circles 
wherein  the  increase  is  developed  for  the  use  of  all  great 
bodies  that  are  not  supplied  with  it  at  the  time  they  are 
created.  Fluidic  matter  is  susceptible  to  the  incision  of 
ether  of  all  kinds.  This  gives  it  a  clear  formation  of 
bodies  if  utilized  for  such  purposes.  In  the  condition  of 
Immensity  that  holds  what  is  known  as  the  foundation  of 
nebulae,  you  will  often  find  great  quantities  of  what  looks 
like  a  highly  colored  formation  of  dust  particles,  spirit 
calls  them  star-dust ;  and  if  they  become  imbued  through 
passing  edges  of  nebulae  or  through  the  force  of  the 
action  of  nebulae  penetrating  to  the  centers  of  them,  they 
are  instantly  molded  or  transformed  into  what  is  known 
as  stars  or  small  bodies  of  crystalized  light.  If  they 
attract,  during  this  creation,  any  vital  force,  they  begin  to 
grow  and  develop,  ofttimes  assuming  as  large  a  form  as 

50 


a  planet  or  even  in  their  smaller  degrees  of  size,  about  two 
million  times  as  large  as  your  earth. 

I  am  giving  you  these  thoughts  that  you  may  be  able 
to  become  conscious  of  a  portion  of  what  is  in  Immensity. 

There  is  one  condition  of  Immensity  that  holds  what 
would  be  an  explained  problem  and  that  is  where  the  crea- 
tion of  what  you  call  Attraction  is  produced.  It  is  not 
anything  that  is  very  complicated  as  far  as  look  is  con- 
cerned, as  you  will  only  see  innumerable  wires  of  light 
moving  in  opposite  directions,  sometimes  in  circles,  some- 
times oblong  and  sometimes  in  waves.  The  use  of  this  is 
what  Science  calls  gravity,  but  it  is  only  a  simplified  form 
of  attraction.  And  here  I  wish  to  say,  that  what  is  known 
as  the  law  of  gravity  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  with  the 
law  of  attraction  in  the  degrees  of  light.  If  there  is  any 
dark  substance,  then  this  law  of  attraction  creates  for 
itself  what  you  would  call  gravity,  but  you  will  find  that 
is  soon  to  be  done  away  with.  The  great  problem  of  the 
past  gave  it  in  this  way,  that  all  heavy  bodies  were 
attracted  toward  the  earth,  lighter  bodies  passing  away 
from  it ;  and  you  will  find  in  later  experiences  in  a  human 
way  that  even  very  heavy  bodies  can  pass  at  great  dis- 
tances away  from  the  earth  if  they  create  for  themselves 
a  more  rapid  vibration  than  the  earth  is  making  as  it 
revolves  within  its  own  orbit. 

All  great  bodies  that  have  existed  near  or  around  the 
earth  are  given  a  place  in  Immensity  perfected,  however, 
to  the  highest  degree  possible. 

I  will  tell  you  a  little  of  my  experience  along  this  line. 
I  discovered  that  what  is  known  as  the  great  Atlantis,  a 
portion  of  which  was  attracted  into  Immensity  through 
light,  was  drawn  close  to  the  original  condition  and  forms 
a  tremendous  space  within  Immensity.  The  reason  for 
this  is  on  account  of  their  holding  the  perfect  law  of 
Infinite,  a  portion  of  which  they  have  given  to  the  earth. 

51 


The  other,  however,  they  still  hold  until  it  can  be  utilized 
for  spirit  that  is  created  for  earth.  It  lies  within  Im- 
mensity surrounded  by  great  oceans  of  light  bounded  on 
every  side  by  clusters  of  universes  of  different  degrees, 
some  bound,  some  free,  some  are  great  universes  and 
some  are  not. 

The  High  Heavens  occupy  a  space  in  Immensity  and 
have  never  been  changed  as  far  as  its  orbit  is  concerned. 
Other  Heavens  are  there  also,  some  lying  in  a  northerly 
direction  and  some  in  a  southerly  direction,  while  others 
are  to  the  east.  Innumerable  as  are  the  great  conditions 
within  Immensity,  there  is  never  any  time  but  what  you 
can  pass  within  it  and  find  new  and  great  things  that  you 
have  never  known  before.  In  all  my  experience  as  far  as 
spirit  is  concerned,  I  have  never  reached  a  limitation.  As 
rapidly  as  it  is  possible  for  you  to  assimilate  my  thought, 
I  would  like  to  gather  together  from  out  of  Immensity 
that  which  I  know  can  be  placed  in  words  that  can  be 
understood  and  enlighten  the  great  thought  that  at  pres- 
ent is  drifting  closer  and  closer,  unto  man. 

I  found  one  condition  in  Immensity  that  to  me  was 
very  interesting,  and  it  was  known  as  the  Land  of  Vision. 
In  and  through  this  pass  many  at  all  times,  some  seeking 
a  vision  to  use  while  they  hold  a  relationship  with  physi- 
cal bodies;  others  seeking  a  vision  that  will  give  them 
what  will  be  known  as  a  knowledge  of  higher  thought 
along  various  lines.  It  is  here  that  vision  of  spirit  intensi- 
fies itself  and  you  will  often  find  them  seeking  out  how 
to  actually  put  into  some  place  or  condition  that  which 
has  been  used  by  themselves  at  different  intervals  through 
vision,  but  not  intensified  enough  to  make  it  an  actual 
thought  for  themselves. 

Immensity  is  traversed  in  a  central  manner,  beginning 
with  the  Great  Heavens  the  pathways  over  which  you 
pass  as  spirit  goes  forth  are  like  the  spokes  of  a  wheel 

52 


intercepted  here  and  there  by  main  lines,  and  every  one  of 
these  hold  great  stations,  as  you  would  call  them.  Here 
many  times  spirit  begins  to  use  many  of  the  advanced 
creations.  They  are  presided  over  by  they  who  have  held 
the  place  for  a  long  time,  utilizing  Infinite  knowledge. 

The  southern  portion  of  Immensity  has  parallel  lines 
that  you  travel,  that  end,  as  it  were,  in  circles.  Here  it  is 
that  you  find  many  great  Illumined  Worlds  moving  back- 
ward and  forward  upon  these  parallel  lines,  and  then 
changing  their  courses  by  taking  up  the  circles.  I  ques- 
tioned the  reason  for  such  an  existence  and  they  told  me 
that  even  their  movement  increased  the  expansion  of 
Immensity.  It  was  through  this  knowledge  that  there 
was  born  to  me  this  thought — that  spirit,  as  it  moves 
even  in  relationship  to  physical,  expands  its  power  of 
understanding  and  its  growth  and  its  faculty  of  absorp- 
tion. 

In  placing  what  is  known  as  great  causes,  such  as 
occur  within  the  different  habitations  of  earth,  I  found 
this,  that  there  are  great  bodies  that  pass  through  Im- 
mensity— what  their  powers  are  or  what  purpose  they 
have  in  making  this  transit,  I  do  not  know ;  I  only  know 
this,  that  I  saw,  and  Immensity  seemed  to  open  and  the 
effect  of  that  opening  was  to  separate,  for  a  time,  into  two 
great  divisions;  it  closed,  however,  and  I  saw  no  disap- 
pearance, but  the  great  bodies  moved  onward.  Then  it  was 
that  I  watched  what  effect  it  had  upon  different  orbits 
within  which  was  situated  great  light  bodies,  universes 
or  heavens,  and  I  saw  that  it  produced  for  them  what  was 
known  as  Epochs,  and  what  was  told  me  was,  that  it  pro- 
duced for  your  earth  what  was  known  as  the  different 
ages;  apparently  there  was  no  particular  formation  of 
time.  The  shape  was  as  if  you  had  taken  an  oblong 
square  and  formulated  it  into  a  great  glowing  mass  of 
light.  I  found  no  master  who  could  tell  me  if  those  bodies 

53 


were  inhabited,  and  as  far  as  it  was  possible  for  me  to 
learn,  no  explanation  was  given  as  to  why  Immensity 
opened  for  them.  It  is  for  me  to  develop  sufficiently  to 
understand  the  meaning  of  this.  But  if  they  hold  the 
power  to  develop  epochs  for  great  orbits  of  planets  and 
higher  conditions  of  spiritual  light  and  produce  ages  for 
the  earth,  there  is  for  me  a  wonderful  problem  to  learn 
and  to  understand.  It  will  certainly  be  greater  than  any 
mathematical  calculation  I  have  ever  undertaken. 

In  explaining  this  Immensity  I  would  like  to  place  for 
those  who  are  not  students,  a  pleasant  thought.  I  found 
in  Immensity,  holding  a  place  near  the  orbit  of  the  earth, 
many  places  that  look  like  small  islands ;  here  it  was  that 
I  found  great  spirit  bodies  that  had  not  entered  into  a 
knowledge  of  the  earth,  but  were  there  to  come  in  con- 
tact with  any  spirit  who  came  from  out  of  universes  or 
spheres.  They  hold  a  wonderful  knowledge  of  the  chemi- 
calization of  that  out  of  which  forces  are  created.  They 
also  have  a  knowledge  of  the  intellect  of  all  chemicalized 
conditions,  whether  within  the  earth  or  upon  the  planets 
or  universes.  I  also  found  portions  that  looked  like  great 
islands  that  held  immense  forms  like  you  would  see 
mountains;  here  I  found  the  dwellers  lived  at  a  great 
height  above  what  floated  around  them.  Here  they  held 
what  was  known  as  the  greatest  observatory  develop- 
ments, such  as  penetration  into  spaces  and  the  powers  of 
calculating  the  movement  of  all  great  suns  and  satellites 
that  lie  outside  of  any  condition  of  the  earth.  I  also  found 
great  bodies  of  land  upon  which  grew  every  form  that 
the  portions  of  the  earth  have  besides  what  was  known 
as  the  imperishable  formation  and  growth  of  all  grains, 
trees  and  flowers,  and  even  that  which  is  within  your 
seas;  also  immense  growths  that  did  not  have  any  such 
appearance  within  the  earth.  It  was  here  that  I  learned 
something  about  the  manner  by  which  the  pigments  of 

54 


coloring  are  transferred  through  the  intelligence  of  all 
mineral,  vegetable  and  plant  life. 

I  was  also  greatly  interested  in  that  portion  of  Im- 
mensity that  contained  what  they  called  the  creation  of 
suns  and  satellites.  You,  as  human,  would  have  thought 
it  impossible  to  penetrate  into  what  would  be  the  heat, 
as  you  would  call  it,  but  as  spirit  is  not  affected  by  such 
conditions,  it  was  no  difficult  matter  for  us  to  come  very 
close  to  these  great  creations. 

I  found  that  portion  that  created  satellites  always  held 
flashes  of  great  lights  as  if  they  were  interrupted  in  their 
perfect  flow  that  formed  what  was  known  as  satellites, 
some  of  which  are  perfectly  regular  like  cones  or  extended 
rods ;  others  were  twisted  ;  while  others  had  ragged  edges, 
but  this  did  not  interfere  with  either  their  coloring  or 
light;  it  was  only  as  expressed  to  me  to  form  a  diversity. 

The  creation  of  suns  varied  according  to  the  positions 
they  were  to  hold.  Some  had  great  discs,  one  beneath  the 
other ;  while  others  were  only  solid  discs  with  large  holes 
through  which  great  lights  passed,  revolving  very  rapidly 
it  gave  a  very  brilliant  illumined  condition.  Others  were 
as  if  you  had  taken  a  great  square  piece  of  blazing  light 
suspending  it  from  the  center  by  a  long  ray  of  light  and 
twisted  and  untwisting  it  as  you  would  a  cord  or  thread. 
These  particular  suns  are  used  with  what  they  call  the 
Monolithe  Planets.  These  planets  are  perfectly  square. 
I  do  not  know  how  many  there  are  in  each  cluster  for 
there  are  many  clusters.  They  have  a  multiplicity  of  suns 
always  attending  them  and  they  are  square  to  adapt  them- 
selves to  the  squareness  of  the  planets. 

I  also  saw  where  what  you  would  call  moons  are 
created,  some  of  them  were  perfectly  flat,  while  others 
were  like  pieces  of  transparent  paper ;  others  were  cloud- 
like  in  form ;  but  all  were  subject  to  reflection.  The  man- 
ner of  their  creation  was  the  placing  of  an  intense  light, 

55 


then  throwing  upon  it  the  shadow  of  a  great  disc  out  oi 
which  came  whatever  formation  was  required  for  the 
reflector. 

One  of  the  great  questions  I  asked  was  this  :  As  these 
are  created,  are  they  given  the  intellect  to  know  whether 
they  shall  go  in  one  direction  or  another;  whether  they 
will  know  exactly  what  position  to  take;  whether  they 
will  be  capable  of  holding  any  spirit  body  or  bodies  that 
may  come  unto  them  ?  And  in  every  answer  to  my  ques- 
tions, it  was  "Yes." 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     Marcus,  explain  with  regard  to  spirit  in  this  relationship. 

A.  Spirit  with  its  forces  and  powers  is  always  attracted  to 
higher  degrees  of  consciousness,  unending,  unbounded  and  also 
unlimited.  Even  though  spirit  pass  from  the  Great  Infinite  into 
a  close  relationship  of  physical,  there  is  always  that  which  is 
withheld,  as  it  were,  until  they  have  finished  the  physical  exist- 
ence, then  begins  a  higher  growth,  and,  on  account  of  the  great- 
ness of  Immensity,  it  takes  long  ages  of  time  even  for  spirit  to 
penetrate  and  gather  together  and  hold  that  they  can  under- 
stand it  on  account  of  its  greatness.  Spirit  has  to  develop  its 
mental  faculties,  as  man  develops  his  mental  faculties,  only  upon 
a  higher  plane  of  thought.  Immensity  does  not  hold  all  crea- 
tion, however,  in  a  sense,  as  beyond  Immensity  there  still  lies 
that  greater  creation  of  Infinite  that  makes  us  all  feel  as  we  tra- 
verse in  the  bountiful  supply  of  Infinite  love  that  we  as  spirit 
even  must  strengthen  and  attune  ourselves  to  be  able  to  reach 
all  that  is  created. 

Q.  Marcus,  as  you  come  in  touch  with  those  people,  as 
spirit,  did  they  use  in  different  places  a  different  manner  of 
expressing  their  knowledge? 

A.  Yes,  it  was  as  diversified  as  passing  from  one  portion 
of  the  earth  to  another,  but  the  similarity  of  it  was  contained 
within  the  silent  method  of  speaking  spirit  to  spirit.  But  the 
manner  in  which  they  expressed  their  knowledge  was  different 
as  you  went  from  place  to  place.  I  wondered  at  it  at  first,  but 
soon  adapted  myself  and  it  was  no  disadvantage  to  me  in  any 
way. 

56 


MARCUS— May  6,  1920 

Now  let  me  place  for  thee  that  which  thou  hast  not 
had  as  yet  completed  that  it  may  be  placed  where  I  have 
given  thee  the  thought  of. 

If  a  law  within  Immensity  becomes  fixed,  then  it 
loseth  itself.  If  within  Immensity  there  is  no  change, 
then  it  becomes  unprogressive.  There  is  no  fixed  condi- 
tion; Immensity  is  an  ever  moving,  ever  conscious,  ever 
thought,  in  all  ways.  Harmony  worketh  everywhere  like 
the  nerves  of  the  human  body,  centralizing  itself  upon 
given  points,  yet  as  it  becomes  to  us  a  knowledge,  then  it 
loseth  any  fixed  place.  When  thou  dost  think  of  Im- 
mensity do  not  feel  that  thou  hast  placed  it  with  founda- 
tions that  it  might  remain  ever  thus,  but  think  of  it  as 
thou  wouldst  think  of  something  that  groweth  even  larger 
than  the  place  it  filled  in  the  beginning,  and  as  it  groweth 
larger  thou  knowest  there  are  ever,  ever,  ever  fragments 
that  can  place  a  foundation  for  it  even  greater,  grander 
and  fuller  of  life  than  that  which  had  been  for  us.  Many 
are  they,  who  entering  into  Immensity,  holdeth  this 
thought:  that  it  ever  remaineth.  I  say  unto  thee  the 
Father  doth  not  hold  created  conditions  thus,  He  expands 
them.  He  makes  them  bright  and  fresh  and  clean  and 
new,  and  each  action,  each  creation,  each  movement,  is  a 
new  birth. 

Let  me  give  you  a  thought.  If  we  take  the  stones  and 
place  them  together  for  a  wall  and  we  find  a  domain  that 
we  call  our  own  hath  need  that  we  shall  move  the  wall, 
let  us  only  take  from  out  of  the  wall  the  stones  that  are 
larger  and  use  them  for  a  new  wall.  So  it  will  ever  be 
within  Immensity,  the  larger  thoughts,  the  larger  laws, 
the  greater  consciousness  shalt  ever  be  used  by  us  as  we 
again  and  again  and  again  build. 


57 


LESSON  VI 

FRACTIONS  WITHIN  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— April  I,  1920 

Marcus  comes  tonight  and  says — this  is  what  we  call 
the  Syntax  Dial.  This  measures  what  is  known  as  rari- 
fied  light  and  modified  light.  There  comes  up  in  the 
center  of  it,  as  he  holds  it,  five  points  just  like  a  blaze — 
this  is  what  we  call  modified  light,  and  the  reason  it  is 
modified  is  because  I  hold  it  under  the  control  of  my 
thought  that  your  vision  can  see  and  recognize  it. 

I  took  a  small  portion  of  the  Syntax  Measurement 
from  out  of  Immensity,  congealed  it  through  the  force 
of  the  emanations  of  my  etheric  body.  These  five  points 
control  all  modified  light  through  this  measurement. 

Now  I  will  show  you  rarified  light — Just  in  the  center 
there  comes  up  a  point  as  thin  as  a  hair;  it  begins  to  curl 
when  it  reaches  about  one  inch  above  the  case  he  holds, 
then  it  begins  to  twirl  just  as  you  see  smoke  and  when 
it  reaches  about  five  inches  in  height,  there  comes  out  of 
it  a  very  strong  flame-like  movement.  This,  Marcus  says, 
in  Immensity  is  the  power  utilized  to  convey  to  the 
thought  of  spirit  how  it  can  utilize  rarified  light  when  it 
wishes  to  create  any  light  body,  matters  not  what  it  uses 
that  body  for. 

This  measurement  comprises  few  degrees ;  for  modi- 
fied light  it  never  uses  but  three ;  for  rarified  light  it  may 

58 


sometimes  use  five,  but  never  any  more  than  that,  usually 
less. 

The  conditions  in  Immensity  where  ycu  can  find  it  are 
not  confined  to  any  particular  place;  you  may  find  it  in 
Universes,  in  Spheres  or  in  Worlds,  Zones,  Circles,  or 
different  kinds  of  lights.  It  is  not  always  confined  to  this 
form  or  shape ;  it  sometimes  is  only  in  the  form  of  a  half 
circle,  sometimes  in  a  square  form,  sometimes  oblong. 

The  reason  I  chose  this  manner  of  giving  it  to  you 
that  you  might  describe  it,  is  for  the  purpose  of  showing 
you  how  easily  I  can  unify  fractions  and  place  them  into 
form ;  and  this  is  one  of  the  forms  that  I  use  most  for  this 
purpose.  I  used  it  as  I  penetrated  into  some  portion  of 
the  outer  rim  of  the  Universes  where  I  procured  some  of 
the  knowledge  for  your  lesson. 

Tonight  I  want  to  give  you  what  is  known  as  the 
fractionized  conditions  within  Immensity.  This  is  one 
of  them. 

There  is  another  condition  that  is  called  the  Unit 
Fractions.  It  is  here  where  many  portions  of  great  units, 
after  they  have  unfurled  and  all  knowledge  is  taken  from 
them,  are  left,  that  they  may  be  remolded,  replaced  in 
other  conditions.  Ofttimes  there  is  a  great  force  within 
these  fractions  of  units  upon  which  can  be  builded  new 
universes  and  new  worlds,  for  remember,  there  is  no  frac- 
tion of  units  that  does  not  still  hold  an  impression  of  the 
intelligence  that  is  confined  within  them.  You  take  a 
unit  that  holds  the  intelligence  of  creation  for  any  pur- 
pose, if  this  knowledge  is  removed,  this  portion  of  the 
unit  which  remains  always  holds  a  portion  of  this  intelli- 
gence upon  which  again  can  be  builded  or  created.  It 
depends,  of  course,  greatly  upon  the  spirit  who  uses  it 
and  for  what  purpose  it  is  used. 

Another  fraction  within  Immensity  is  the  first  con- 
sciousness of  the  thought  of  Law.  In  the  beginning,  as 

59 


far  as  I  am  able  to  trace  it,  Law  was  only  a  knowledge, 
but  as  spirit  was  created  for  earth,  it  found  that  there  has 
to  be  a  utilization  of  what  had  come  from  the  Father  as  a 
knowledge  to  be  placed  within  the  form  of  Laws. 

In  Immensity  you  will  find  what  earth  would  term 
wonderful  seats  of  learning ;  with  us  it  is  only  known  as 
an  abiding  place  where  we  can  come  in  touch  and  again 
it  becomes  comprehensible  to  us  where  this  knowledge 
loses  the  thought  of  Law,  and  only  is  an  Infinite  Knowl- 
edge. This  is  one  of  the  most  beautiful  portions  or  frac- 
tions within  Immensity.  It  holds  what  is  known  for  spirit 
as  a  wonderful  rest,  particularly  if  you  have  held  within 
the  earth  a  condition  of  work  where  the  spirit  has  much 
which  is  unconscious,  to  develop.  This  can  be  used  by 
those  who  have  learned  how  to  leave  their  soul-body 
within  the  Spheres  and  penetrate  outside  of  them.  You 
will  find,  however,  when  the  knowledge  of  many  of  the 
Spheres  of  which  man  knows  not,  as  yet,  that  belongs  to 
the  earth,  is  given  you  that  some  of  the  things  within 
Immensity  will  be  within  those.  However,  they  are  not 
placed  exactly  in  the  same  condition,  they  are  simplified 
in  many  ways. 

I  found  among  other  conditions  within  Immensity 
fractions  that  were  known  as  Sphere  Fractions.  They 
will  be  utilized  to  create  a  new  condition  of  spheres. 
Upon  questioning  as  to  where  they  would  be  used  and  for 
what  purpose,  they  gave  me  the  thought  that  as  new 
Worlds  were  created,  these  Spheres  encircle  them.  They 
are  not  like  the  Spheres  that  encircle  the  earth,  they  are 
different  on  account  of  the  higher  purity  that  is  within 
them  and  the  most  wonderful  consciousness  of  spirit  that 
only  spirit  can  comprehend.  These  fractions  form  a  won- 
derful portion  within  Immensity  and  are  held  until  such 
time  as  great  creations,  by  spirit  who  hold  a  place  within 
the  New  Earth,  and  they  will  be  called  upon  to  use  them. 

60 


The  preparation  of  spirit  within  earth  conditions  will 
be  the  one  great  result  of  this  being  used.  These  Spheres, 
according  to  the  master  with  whom  I  came  in  touch,  will 
all  be  illumined,  there  will  be  nothing  that  will  even  rep- 
resent material  within  them.  This  will  give  you  the 
thought  very  plainly  why  it  is  that  spirit  only,  can  use 
them. 

When  I  questioned  him  as  to  what  that  knowledge 
would  represent,  he  laid  his  hand  upon  me  and  said: 
"Marcus,  thou  hast  many,  many  ages  to  traverse  yet  be- 
fore thou  canst  be  answered."  Kindly  was  the  word  he 
gave  me,  but  I  was  satisfied  for  I  knew  that  there  would 
be  so  many  things  come  in  between  that  and  the  time  he 
spoke  of,  that  I  would  certainly  be  busy  enough  to  be 
very,  very  happy. 

Another  fraction  that  is  within  Immensity  is  what  is 
called  Solubility— it  is  the  ability  to  solve  all  problems 
within  Immensity.  The  reason  I  say  "problems"  is  this, 
spirit  in  passing  from  the  Infinite  into  the  consciousness 
of  Universes,  makes  a  direct  expression  of  its  own  power 
to  work  out  what  is  within  its  Universe,  and  also  from  its 
Universe  within  the  consciousness  of  earth  directs  its 
power  into  that ;  unless  called  upon  to  enter  into  Immen- 
sity for  any  particular  purpose,  it  does  not  solve  only  a 
portion  of  the  wonderful  conditions  of  Immensity.  But 
after  it  has  worked  up  to  the  point  of  seeking  to  solve 
what  is  within  Immensity,  it  finds  there  many  things  that 
would  be  known  as  "problems"  even  to  the  consciousness 
of  spirit.  Many  of  these  problems  from  a  human  point  of 
view,  would  resemble  such  a  set  of  minute  particles  that 
the  human  brain  would  not  become  conscious  of  any 
thought  within  it,  but  spirit  finds  it ;  and  when  it  becomes 
worthy  to  solve  the  problem,  the  minutiae  become  an 
expansive  condition  and  the  problem  is  what  would  be 
known  as  a  tremendous  problem.  This  I  found  upon  in- 

61 


vestigating,  for  I  had  never  undertaken  it  before.  I  found 
also  what  would  be  known  as  an  immense  problem  and 
I  found  that  in  solving  I  would  have  to  work  many  dec- 
ades of  what  man  calls  "time"  on  account  of  its  immen- 
sity and  the  intricate  interwoven  complications  within  it. 
There  are  fractions  of  creative  forces  and  lights  that 
as  you  come  in  touch  with  them  you  have  no  idea  what  is 
within  them  until  you  seem  to  penetrate  as  if  walking 
within  a  room.  I  came  in  touch  with  one  of  these  which 
is  known  as  the  creative  light  force.  I  passed  directly 
into  it  and  I  found  that  directly  in  front  of  me  there 
appeared  suddenly,  as  if  great  rays  passed  out  from  me 
in  every  direction  like  the  blaze  of  suns.  I  looked  upon 
them  and  it  was  as  plain  to  me  as  if  some  one  had  im- 
pressed the  thought  within  my  spirit  sense  that  1  should 
choose  one  of  these  rays  of  light  and  trace  out  my  power 
of  creation.  I  took  the  one  to  the  right  of  me  which  had 
within  it  long  rays  of  yellow  and  violet  colorings.  I  did 
not  question  as  to  why  I  did  this,  it  seemed  as  if  I  knew 
without  the  telling,  and  I  was  led  directly  along  this  ray 
of  light.  Upon  reaching  a  certain  place  within  it  (and  it 
did  not  broaden  from  the  point  I  started  from)  I  seemed 
to  feel  an  expansion  as  if  my  body  in  its  etheric  form 
enlarged.  I  experimented  that  I  might  give  you  a  knowl- 
edge of  my  experience.  I  lifted  my  hands  within  it  and 
there  seemed  to  cling  to  them  like  when  you  dip  your 
hands  into  the  water  the  drops  cling.  I  held  them  closely, 
they  seemed  to  become  so  precious  to  me  I  felt  I  must 
not  lose  them — and  I  held  them.  There  was  first  a 
warmth  which  permeated  my  whole  system ;  then  as  I 
felt  the  pressure  I  opened  my  hands.  If  you  have  ever 
experienced  vague  shadows,  quick  shades  of  light,  chang- 
ing forms  that  had  color  within  them,  you  can  have  a 
vague  realization  of  my  experience.  They  grew  stronger ; 
nothing,  however,  assumed  any  definite  form.  But  as  I 

62 


left  them  within  that  ray  of  light,  I  knew  they  were  the 
children  of  my  creation  and  that  I  could  endow  them  with 
any  portion  of  the  intelligence  of  my  spirit  at  any  time 
in  the  action  of  my  life  in  spirit  that  I  chose  to  do  so. 

In  speaking  with  the  master  after  I  had  left  this  con- 
dition, and  I  had  many  experiences  of  various  kinds,  he 
said  to  me :  "Marcus,  what  would  you  do  if  in  the  course 
of  your  spirit  life  these  creations  do  not  respond  as 
quickly  to  your  intelligence  as  spirit  as  you  would  wish 
them  to — what  would  you  do?"  If  the  flood  of  love  and 
tenderness  within  me  has  any  comparison  with  the 
Father's  I  say  to  you,  as  I  said  to  the  master,  no  power 
could  ever  be  brought  to  bear  that  I  would  change  them 
one  fraction  of  an  iota. 

To  the  human  mind  these  fractions,  unless  the  thought 
has  been  studied  with  the  full  consciousness  of  spirit,  will 
bring  no  realization,  but  with  the  full  consciousness  of 
spirit  the  greatness  of  these  fractions  will  fill  a  wonderful 
place  within  Immensity. 

Another  great  fraction  that  I  found  was  that  which 
holds  the  combined  formation  of  rhythmic  light  without 
which  the  movement  of  all  great  bodies  or  portions  of 
bodies  would  not  be  complete.  Let  me  explain  to  you 
with  regard  to  portions  of  bodies.  These  portions  of 
bodies  are  not  anything  that  would  ever  be  compared  to 
material  solidity,  they  are  like  soft  moving  lights  which 
vary  in  form  but  never  in  size.  This  portion  or  fraction 
holds  for  them  the  Infinite  consciousness  created  for 
them,  and  within  Immensity  they  are  most  preciously 
guarded.  When  I  questioned  those  who  dwell  among  it 
all  they  answered  me  like  unto  this :  When  all  is  ready 
for  the  fulfillment,  for  the  placing  of  Divine  Light,  then 
will  this  be  released — not  before. 

Another  fraction  within  Immensity  holds  what  will  be 
known  as  the  corresponding  utilization  that  man's 

63 


thought  hath  created,  but  it  is  only  a  small  fraction ;  and 
if  reduced  for  the  knowledge  of  man,  would  be  known  as 
only  a  reflection  of  the  thought-ideas,  or  the  idea- 
thoughts.  Sometimes  it  is  used  for  portraying  within 
Immensity  the  conscious  thought  of  the  earth,  simplified 
for  spirit  that  it  may  only  reflect  the  highest  portion  thus 
produced  by  man. 

There  may  be  a  question  placed  before  those  who  are 
studying  these  great  problems  as  to  the  reasons  why 
Immensity  holds  all  these  things.  Since  I  was  with  you, 
since  my  creation  within  the  wonderful  portion  of  frac- 
tionized  light,  I  found  my  spirit  had  gained  an  added 
strength,  and  far  to  the  South  within  Immensity  I  made 
my  way.  What  drew  me?  What  call  my  spirit  had  re- 
ceived I  did  not  question,  it  seemed  to  me  as  if  some 
sweet  thought,  some  tender  memory  of  the  spirit  was 
there  and  needed  me ;  and  so  I  went  my  way.  I  left  for 
a  moment  every  condition  into  which  I  had  passed.  I 
found  there  a  beautiful  island,  around  it  everywhere  was 
the  golden  light,  and  I  knew  I  had  come  close  in  contact 
with  one  of  the  Holy  Places  within  Immensity.  Here  I 
found  one  who  had  been  my  companion  in  many  experi- 
ences, both  within  the  earth  and  within  the  Universes, 
not,  however,  within  the  Seventh  Universe ;  neither  had  I 
come  in  contact  with  him  in  the  Egypt  That  Was.  I 
seemed  to  feel  as  if  I  were  alone  and  naught  else  was 
within  the  Holy  Place  but  this  spirit.  Every  memory 
that  my  spirit  had  ever  had  come  unto  me  there.  A  por- 
tion of  the  great  Universe  of  Knowledge  was  mine,  frag- 
ments of  which  had  been  folded  away  and  I  had  not  even 
demanded  an  explanation  of  it.  My  unity  with  the  Infi- 
nite seemed  to  be  perfect,  yet  in  words  there  was  nothing 
spoken  unto  me.  If  when  you  think  of  me  in  the  future 
think  that  this  was  one  of  the  great  conscious  dreams  of 
spirit  life.  I  remained  in  it  long  enough  to  become  thor- 

64 


oughly  attuned  with  what  Infinite  held  for  me.  I  also 
found  that  as  I  passed  once  more  back  into  the  great  prob- 
lems of  Immensity  I  had  sweetly  attuned  myself  to  a 
more  delicate  understanding  of  the  great  things  the 
Father  had  created.  If  I  should  say  to  you  that  it  looked 
different,  felt  different,  was  different,  you  will  perhaps 
understand  me.  The  horizon  of  my  spiritual  knowledge 
had  broadened,  so  the  fractions  of  Immensity  lie  not 
for  me,  with  many  unsolved  problems.  I  knew  that  it 
was  right  and  just  according  as  the  Father's  thought  had 
given  me.  What  is  the  solving  of  problems  to  spirit  un- 
less it  brings  closer  to  spirit  that  thought  of  the  Father 
unto  them  and  when  the  thought  of  the  Father  comes,  all 
things  vague  and  unreal  are  left  to  be  understood.  Un- 
derstanding to  spirit  is  one  of  the  great  beauties  of  spirit 
work  and  thought,  but  earth  children  can  have  no  com- 
prehension of  it  in  any  way.  Man  with  his  finite  mind 
can  strive  to  penetrate,  but  only  so  far,  and  then  he  loses, 
and  within  the  chaos  he  finds  himself  groping  in  the  dark- 
ness and  it  is  only  that  you  place  it  as  a  wonderful 
thought  holding  within  it  the  sweetness  that  exists  as 
faith  comes  unto  you  that  all  is  well. 

What  is  within  immensity  will  ofttimes  remind  you 
of  the  things  you  would  like  to  know  which  you  have 
never  learned. 

The  reduction  of  all  these  fractions  into  their  proper 
place  may  be  the  work  of  great  masters  or  it  may  be  that 
the  Father  will  create  those  who  will  work  it  out  even 
better  than  great  masters ;  and  when  we  say  great  mas- 
ters, we  mean  they  who  hold  for  us,  even  in  spirit,  the 
true  light  that  leadeth  us  evermore  onward,  upward  and 
into  that  consciousness  of  light,  that  memory  of  spirit, 
that  great  perfect  unsolved  realm  that  the  Father  keepeth 
for  us  evermore. 

65 


Immensity  is  full,  here  and  there  and  everywhere  spirit 
searches  out  and  finds  many  who  are  walking  in  the  same 
way  and  searching  as  they  are  individually.  But  there  is 
always  a  Brotherhood,  always  they  who  help  you  and  like 
coming  unto  you  from  the  invisible  world  reaching  out 
the  hand  of  comradeship,  true,  loving  and  faithful  even 
unto  the  end. 

Marcus,  you  got  your  lessons  as  well  as  the  rest?  Yea 
verily,  without  each  day's  lessons  we  would  not  be  as 
closely  connected  with  everything  the  Father  creates,  and 
we  know  how  wonderfully  genuine  and  true  it  all  is. 

I  came  so  close  in  touch  in  the  fractionizing  of  many 
things  with  the  one  I  told  you  about  a  long  time  ago,  the 
one  who  ruled  as  a  queen  in  Egypt ;  I  had  no  particular 
knowledge  with  regard  to  her  spirit  but  I  found  her 
searching  within  Immensity  for  the  knowledge  of  color 
and  form.  She  knew  me  and  spoke  to  me,  and  as  if  friends 
had  come  in  touch  with  one  another,  she  told  me  of  some 
of  her  experiences.  She  went  her  way  and  I  went  mine 
and  as  I  come  in  touch  with  you  I  think  how  closely  the 
great  lights  that  the  Father  placeth  for  us  that  we  lose 
not  our  way,  each  one  of  us  oft  wander  close  to  where 
they  are  touching  for  a  moment  as  we  do  in  earth  life,  a 
greeting  and  a  going  on  to  stand  once  more  in  the  great 
divine  light  as  one  in  the  presence  of  both  Infinite  and 
Divine. 

I  want  to  give  to  you  in  the  latter  portion  of  these 
lessons,  briefly  and  simply  here  and  there,  some  of  what 
would  be  known  to  you  as  the  brotherhood  of  spirit  and 
why  it  is  as  we  come  in  touch  with  them  whom  we  have 
known  within  earth  that  there  is  that  sweetness  of  friend- 
ship that  seems  to  be  the  bond  between  us. 


66 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     What  is  this  lesson? 

A.     You  may  call  it  The  Fractions  Within  Immensity. 

Q.     Are  the  atoms  a  unified  fraction  of  the  human  body? 
A.     No,  only  as  the  atoms  pass  through,  that  does  not  frac- 
tionize  atoms. 

Q.     Are  atoms  these  fractions? 

A.  No,  they  are  individual  creations.  If  they  were  frac- 
tions they  would  have  to  seek  out  this  fraction  and  bring  them 
together.  But  they  are  not.  I  explained  to  you  before  in  one 
of  the  lessons  the  creation  of  atoms;  if  you  look  back  you  will 
find  it.  They  are  created  as  individually  as  anything  could  be. 
There  is  one  of  the  great  problems  of  earth. 

Q.     Why  are  they  not? 

A.  Because  spirit  never  uses  these  fractions  that  I  am  tell- 
ing you  about  until  they  become  spirit,  on  account  of  the  in- 
tensity of  Infinite  thought  and  intelligence  that  is  within  them 
which  cannot  be  placed  or  fractionized  into  the  earth.  They 
may  become,  as  they  were  before,  previous  within  the  earth, 
undeveloped  individually  as  atoms,  but  never  incomplete  as  a 
fraction  would  be. 

Q.  Atoms  which  we  use — any  atoms  which  the  earth  has, 
when  they  are  created,  are  they  any  larger  than  the  way  we  have 
them  here? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Are  they  condensed? 

A.  No,  sir;  they  are  always  that  size.  Look  at  the  grains 
of  sand — you  have  your  answer.  If  you  begin  to  fractionize 
atoms,  then  you  go  back  to  their  original  creation  which  I  have 
given  you  when  they  were  not  atoms.  When  you  fractionize  and 
leave  atoms  then  you  go  back  and  they  are  something  else. 
If  you  take  your  own  spirit  and  divide  and  fractionize  it  you  send 
it  back  to  the  Infinite  breath — then  it  is  not  spirit,  it  is  Infinite 
breath. 


67 


LESSON  VII 

THE  HUMAN  HEAVENS  OF  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— January  8,  1920 

Once  more  as  the  passing  of  what  man  calls  Time 
holds  us  for  a  moment,  we  come  close  enough  to  give  you 
what  we  would  call  a  knowledge  of  many  creations.  In 
this  lesson  I  am  going  to  come  closer  to  earth,  bringing 
to  those  who  shall  read  it,  a  clear  thought  of  Immensity, 
which  holds  even  this  creation  and  touches  the  orbit  of 
the  earth,  ringing  forth,  as  it  does,  the  wonderful  anthems 
that  proclaim  that  in  the  Father's  creations  all  is  perfect. 

In  his  seeking,  the  mind  of  man  has  created  for  him- 
self certain  limitations,  yet  the  present  Age  holds  for  him 
a  strength  and  a  power  wherein  he  recognizes  that  lay- 
ing aside  that  which  has  been  in  the  past  and  penetrating 
into  what  the  present  Age  holds  for  him,  he  finds  that 
mind  is  absolutely  controlled  by  spirit ;  and  in  the  loosen- 
ing of  this,  he  also  understands  fully  that  spirit  has  no 
limitations. 

Let  me  make  it  plain  and  talk  to  you  as  if  you  were 
with  me  and  with  the  masters  who  have  worked  unceas- 
ingly in  the  great  plan  the  Father  has  made. 

Immensity  had  gathered  many  masters  from  out  of 
its  Universes  ;  they  who  had  come  had  builded  the  founda- 
tions of  the  earth.  They  who  had  worked  with  all  the 
forces  at  their  command,  watched  the  gathering  of  the 

68 


atoms  from  out  of  the  nebulae;  these  atoms  were  the 
residue  of  planetary  life. 

That  this  may  be  plain  to  others  I  will  explain  a  little. 

First,  Infinite  Light  becomes  fractionized  and  those 
fractions  are  called  "electrons."  As  they  gather  strength 
and  power,  again  they  are  fractionized,  and,  for  the  sake 
of  man's  understanding,  they  are  called  planetary  atoms. 
In  the  creation  within  the  nebulae  of  the  planets  the 
movement  of  electrons  created,  unceasingly,  planetary 
atoms.  This  left  a  residue.  The  residue  was  called  forth, 
gathered  together  and  created  and  made  earth.  Now  we 
have  Infinite  Light  sent  forth  and  separated  among  the 
masters  of  Universes.  Through  the  law  of  their  Uni- 
verse they  utilized  this  Light  and  again  re-created.  For 
the  sake  of  making  this  explanation  not  too  long,  we  will 
say  that  the  earth  is  brought  together,  its  orbit,  its  plan- 
ets, its  stars,  its  universes,  its  circles — and  all  that  is 
needful  is  there.  But  again  the  consciousness  of  Infinite 
Light  seems  to  speak  as  it  moves  among  the  masters,  and 
as  the  love-thought  breathes  tenderly  within  itself,  the 
masters  know  that  there  shall  be  within  the  earth,  not 
only  the  souls  of  men,  but  the  infinite  spirits  of  men, 
called  forth  that  they  might  complete  that  which  the 
Father  has  given  them  to  do.  Amidst  all  those  who  are 
together  Divinity  speaks  with  the  voice  of  love :  "In  all 
My  Father's  creation  and  with  all  the  Infinite  Light,  what 
thinkest  thou  shall  be  the  abiding  place  of  them  when 
they  come  forth  ?"  Every  master  answered :  "Yea  verily, 
we  give  all  the  Infinite  Light  the  Father  gives  us.  What 
saith  Thou,  Master,  we  shall  create?"  It  seemed  as  if  the 
tenderness  and  the  voice  of  the  Father's  love  breathed 
itself  amidst  them  all — then  the  Son  spake:  "We  shall 
create  Spheres  for  earth."  "How  shall  we  create  them?" 
(Am  I  making  this  plain?)  "First,"  the  Son  saith,  "there 
shall  be  one  who  shall  be  close  to  the  earth."  One  of  the 

69 


masters  spoke  and  said :  "Shall  it  be  within  Immensity, 
or  shall  we  place  it  within  the  orbit  of  the  earth?"  An- 
other spake,  and  if  I  say  it  wast  thou.  thou  shalt  under- 
stand me.  "Master,",  thou  didst  say,  "give  it  within  Im- 
mensity, for  Thou  knowest  that  Immensity  moves  and  is 
closer  to  the  Infinite."  How  thou  didst  know  that  the 
spirit  would  need  it,  I  know  not ;  mayhaps  it  was  because 
the  Father  had  spoken  unto  thee  when  thou  didst  worship 
and  serve  Him — I  know  not.  And  the  Son  spake  and  He 
didst  say :  "The  First  Sphere  bringeth  thou  from  out  of 
the  Infinite  Light  of  the  Seventh  Universe."  It  was 
brought,  the  particles  gleamed,  glittered  and  flowed  like 
great  rhythms  hither  and  thither  and  yonder,  the  forces 
and  the  powers  within  Immensity  breathed  forth  like 
clouds  of  light — and  the  first  Sphere  of  earth  and  for  earth 
was  created. 

If  thou  shouldst  be  questioned  thou  canst  answer — it 
is  like  a  cloud,  soft  and  fragrant,  and  has  within  it  breath 
that  spirit  breathes  unto  itself  when  it  takes  its  soul-body 
out  in  the  boundless  space  wherein  spirit  dwells. 

Within  this  Sphere  is  a  great  condition  prepared  for 
those  who  pass  forth.  It  holds  within  Immensity  the 
consciousness  of  harmony  and,  as  Immensity  claims  from 
it  a  response,  it  gives  it. 

This  Sphere  is  utilized  and  often  holds  for  spirit 
scarcely  any  difference  between  earth  and  itself;  yet  if 
you  watch  it  closely,  as  spirit,  immediately  you  can  see 
the  changes  taking  place.  It  is  here  that  Immensity  gath- 
ered together  what  is  known  as  the  great  River  of  Puri- 
fication. I  give  it  this  name  that  you  may  understand 
and  that  others  may  understand  me.  This  River,  or  Sea, 
is  filled  full  of  vibrant  and  radiant  light,  and  it  is  here 
where  the  first  condition  of  the  soul-body  begins  to  hold 
the  wonderful  impressions  of  the  Spheres.  I  am  making 
this  so  plain  that  no  one  can  misunderstand  me.  It  is  not 

70 


a  transient  condition  within  Immensity,  but  one  that  holds 
a  perfect  reality,  strong — deep  truth  and  consciousness. 
Every  spirit  that  leaves  the  human  body  finds  itself 
within  it  and  has  a  full  realization.  Ofttimes  from  out 
of  Immensity  is  brought  a  higher  consciousness,  and  this 
Sphere,  through  that,  is  always  clarified  of  any  finite  par- 
ticles that  may  have  adhered  to  the  soul-body. 

It  is  the  transition  through  this  Sphere  and  the  thor- 
ough consciousness  of  Immensity  in  the  varied  transitions 
of  thought,  by  spirit,  which  produce  in  the  human  brain 
many  things  that  do  not  correspond  with  that  which  has 
passed  beyond  into  the  depth  of  Immensity,  which  holds, 
not  only  the  Zones  and  Illumined  Worlds,  but  the  many 
Universes.  Ofttimes  a  spirit  with  a  soul-body  may  re- 
main here  with  no  realization  of  the  passing  of  Immensity 
as  it  clarifies  this  Sphere.  But  it  is  impossible  for  a  spirit 
to  remain  long,  as  the  movement  of  this  Sphere  changes 
with  every  movement  of  any  new  creation  within  Immen- 
sity ;  the  effect  of  this  is  to  produce,  at  these  intervals  of 
creation,  a  higher  sense  of  consciousness  to  spirit;  also 
the  soul-body  responds  immediately.  If  you  hear,  in  the 
varied  communications  given  to  earth  by  what  is  claimed 
as  spirit,  this  will  explain  it  very  readily.  The  action  of 
the  brain  does  not  comprehend  the  great  response  of  spirit 
as  it  first  holds  itself  in  communication. 

This  Sphere  is  closely  connected  with  the  second 
Sphere.  Here  it  is  where  spirit  first  recognizes  fully  that 
Immensity  holds  all  things,  for  it  is  within  this  Sphere  that 
many  records  are  placed.  Its  reflection  in  holding  all 
this,  is  a  portion  of  Immensity  through  which  it  passes,  as 
Immensity  first,  holds  the  origin  of  creation;  then  the 
earth ;  and  the  mind  of  man,  actuated  by  spirit,  with  the 
material  at  its  command,  strives  to  produce  a  reflection 
of  that  which  is  within  Immensity.  Again,  in  order  that 
it  be  made  perfect,  this  Sphere  holds  what  is  known  as  the 

7i 


Counter  Reflection,  or  the  returning  to  the  original  crea- 
tion. 

In  speaking  of  the  creations  within  Immensity,  you 
will  find,  as  you  pass  through  it,  that  you  can  always  dis- 
cover a  new  creation.  As  you  strive  to  explain  this  to 
others,  the  only  way  in  which  I  can  express  it,  is  to  say, 
it  is  as  if — I  think — and  thought  becomes  a  realization. 

This  sphere  is  one  of  the  largest,  if  I  may  so  place  it, 
that  lies  within  Immensity.  They  tell  me  that  in  the 
transition  of  the  earth  and  the  unifying  of  the  Spheres 
into  what  is  known  as  the  New  Solaric  System,  this 
Sphere  will  remain  intact.  It  will  be  placed  within  the 
Electic  Circle,  there  to  remain  for  all  spirit  that  may 
choose  to  seek  out  any  great  thought  or  ideal  that  earth 
may  have  held  for  them.  In  this  transition  Immensity 
reveals  for  us  one  of  the  greatest  thoughts  that  man  can 
claim.  It  is  like  this :  the  unifying  of  the  Spheres  into  the 
Solaric  System  will  require  a  number  of  ages,  even  in  the 
creation  of  the  Infinite.  For  they  tell  me  that  these 
Spheres  have  accumulated  or  attracted  to  themselves  a 
great  deal  out  of  Immensity,  and  in  this  movement  the 
Infinite  will  place  some  of  the  highest  forces  of  creation 
in  order  that  the  passing  shall  be  most  perfect. 

I  questioned  one  of  the  masters  as  he  gave  me  this 
knowledge,  and  I  said  unto  him,  "In  this  enactment  shall 
Immensity  give  us  any  of  its  great  forces?"  "Nay,  not 
so;  the  Father  will  create  a  new  force  for  this  purpose." 
Then  he  showed  me  the  creation  of  that  which  is  called 
the  electroid  forces  that  create  ether  for  the  earth.  I 
watched  it  and,  that  I  may  make  it  as  plain  as  possible, 
the  only  thing  I  can  say  is  this :  it  was  as  if  there  were 
many  globes  of  light,  very  large,  very  clear  and  very  soft 
in  their  light,  and  they  seemed  to  move  one  within  an- 
other until  from  out  of  them  rose  a  vapor-like  movement 
which,  at  first,  became  spiral  in  form,  then  as  it  rose  to 

72 


a  great  height,  it  spread  itself  out  into  Immensity  in  long 
ribbons  of  light  which  seemed  to  increase  as  they  passed 
onward  through  Immensity.  "This,"  he  said,  "is  the  crea- 
tion of  some  forces."  In  speaking  to  man  I  know  he  will 
wonder  to  himself,  as  the  wind  and  the  storm  and  break 
of  the  electric  currents  to  him  at  times  seem  almost  ap- 
palling, but  the  creation  of  forces  and  their  movements 
within  Immensity  brings  forth  no  clash,  no  separating  of 
anything;  while  the  forces  within  the  orbit  of  the  earth, 
coming  in  contact  with  material  and  planetary  atoms,  pro- 
duce a  friction  which  then  produces  sound,  and  it  has  the 
power,  when  so  congealed,  to  separate  material,  or,  as 
man  would  say,  destroy. 

The  Third  Sphere  is  not  used  very  much  except  by 
spirit  who  is  determined  in  a  sense  of  the  word,  to  hold 
for  a  long  period  of  time,  its  place  within  a  soul-body. 
Here  within  the  Third  Sphere  is  where  they  hold  it  and 
it  is  here  where  spirit  learns  the  power  of  holding  it.  The 
only  explanation  I  can  give  is  this :  That  here  and  there 
and  everywhere  such  a  spirit  catches  a  glimpse  of  what 
is  within  Immensity  and  seeking  to  hold  its  soul-body, 
draws  unto  itself  a  knowledge  of  what  is  within  Immen- 
sity. This  is  always  known  of  those  who  have  brought 
to  the  earth  any  great  forward  movement  or  progress  or 
the  creating  of  any  new  development. 

You  will  find  within  this  Sphere  many  great  actions  of 
what  you  would  call  machinery-like  movements,  although 
no  machinery  of  any  kind  is  within  it,  but  the  movements 
are  there,  and  as  spirit  looks  forth  from  this  Sphere  into 
Immensity,  it  draws  a  consciousness  of  that  new  creation 
and  sets  it  in  motion.  This  Sphere  is  utilized  for  this 
purpose  and  it  is  here  that  the  soul-body  grows  stronger 
in  every  way. 

You  will  find  here  many  masters  who  still  hold  a  soul 
functioning  and  come  to  earth  that  they  may  influence 

73 


like  masters  and  thus  develop  the  brain  force  to  utilize 
whatever  is  needful  for  the  earth. 

You  may  call  your  friend,  Mr.  Edison  of  America,  one 
of  these  characters. 

The  Third  Sphere,  however,  is  very  interesting*,  for 
that  reason,  and  you  will  find  that  Immensity  gives  unto 
it  many  great  conditions. 

I  would  like  to  make  Immensity  a  wonderful  play- 
ground for  human  thought,  that  they  may  find  within  it 
that  which  will  develop  and  lead  them  onward  into  a 
higher  condition.  Ofttimes  they  who  come  from  earth 
realizing  what  they  have  striven  to  create  for  earth,  find 
that  their  creations  needed  only  a  fraction  to  make  them 
more  perfect  so  they  gather  it  together  and  if  the  soul- 
body  is  strong  enough,  they  then  utilize  and,  returning  to 
earth,  give  it  forth  in  a  more  perfected  condition.  In  the 
many  ages  of  earth's  habitations  this  has  often  reached  a 
high  degree.  The  present  age,  however,  is  only  just  be- 
ginning to  realize  and  draw  closely  from  out  of  Immen- 
sity, through  the  Third  Sphere,  some  of  the  great  crea- 
tions that  already  hold  their  motive  powers  within  the 
Third  Sphere,  ready  still  to  have  that  fraction  of  perfec- 
tion that  this  age  has  not  reached. 

In  your  lessons  I  do  not  like  to  have  you  feel  as  if  we 
were  only  traveling  one  road,  and  in  this  lesson  I  would 
like  to  have  you  know  that  often  as  I  come  to  earth,  I 
meet  with  those  who  seem  to  feel  that  they  are  a  stranger 
in  a  strange  land.  These  are  they  whose  soul-bodies  have 
only  absorbed  what  some  one  else  already  has  used.  I 
have  had  some  very  peculiar  experiences  along  this  line 
of  thought  and  corresponding  to  what  you  in  human  life 
have  always  considered  as  a  portion  of  yourself — a  sort  of 
a  joyousness,  I  too,  hold  it,  so  I  am  going  to  relate  it  to 
you. 

74 


I  passed  through  the  orbit  of  the  earth  and  among  the 
many  resting  places  that  lie  within  your  atmosphere,  I 
found  a  group  of  disembodied  spirits.  Some  of  them  were 
perfectly  satisfied  in  their  passing  out  of  human  bodies, 
while  others  seemed  to  feel  that  they  should  have  been 
allowed  to  have  had  a  little  more  time  to  accomplish  what 
they  had  undertaken.  But  after  stopping  with  them  I 
found  that  if  they  had  something  else  to  do  they  were  per- 
fectly willing  to  go  their  way.  I  gave  them  some  of  my 
experiences  and  one  whose  soul-body  seemed  to  have 
been  very  much  distorted  by  the  accumulation  of  horrid 
mentalities,  straightening  the  soul-body,  the  spirit  flashed 
over  it  like  a  ray  of  light  this  thought :  "I  am  conscious, 
I  need  no  other  thought  save  what  the  Father  gave  me/' 
And  I  with  a  joyous  consciousness  of  my  own  said :  "Hail 
comrade,  go  thy  way,  thy  next  resting  place  as  thou  dost 
traverse  forth  into  Immensity  it  will  hold  for  thee  that 
which  shall  give  thee  what  the  earth  has  never  had." 
Turning,  he  spake  to  me  in  the  words  of  earth:  "Yea, 
Brother,  whoever  thou  art,  I  say  unto  you,  I  am  glad  I 
met  you  and  when  we  meet  again  I  will  certainly  give  you 
the  best  that  I  have/'  Let  me  tell  this  as  it  is,  that  even 
they  who  think  little  may  understand,  understand  it 
plainly,  for  I  do  not  wish  that  this  should  be  something 
that  would  not  hold  close  to  each  other  my  thought. 

I  am  going  to  answer  a  question  that  hovers  so  close 
around  you  tonight  and  it  is  this :  Yes,  Marcus  is  an  indi- 
vidual spirit  and  you  are  another.  If,  under  the  Father's 
will,  our  lives  as  spirit  have  blended  together  and  if  we 
come  in  contact  with  others  whom  we  have  known  in  the 
spirit,  remember  that  every  spirit  created  by  the  Father, 
be  it  for  earth  or  otherwise,  knows  one  another  and  feels 
the  bond  of  spirit  one  to  the  other.  I  am  real,  I  am  con- 
scious, I  see,  I  hear  and  I  know.  What  more  can  Marcus 
know — what  more  real  conditions  can  he  be. 

75 


In  giving  you  this  lesson  I  would  have  you  know  that 
when  we  arrange  them,  this  lesson  will  be  among  the 
first,  while  the  others  I  have  given  you,  being  more  scien- 
tific and  perhaps  a  little  more  obtuse,  must  necessarily 
follow.  But  I  will  explain  to  you.  I  come  to  you,  I  look 
at  the  conditions,  I  feel  the  vibrations,  then  I  establish  the 
current  of  thought  and  I  utilize  it.  Sometimes  I  can  adapt 
my  language  for  its  interpretation  into  one  form,  at  other 
times  into  another.  At  times  the  establishment  of  the 
vibrations  is  historical ;  some  times  it  is  a  consciousness ; 
sometimes  it  is  a  knowledge  of  creation  and  sometimes 
it  partakes  of  the  individualization  of  spirit,  their  place, 
their  use  and  their  relationship.  This,  of  course,  is  what 
I  would  say  to  you. 

My  next  lesson  I  give  you  will  be  your  consciousness 
in  Immensity ;  your  search  for  the  material  out  of  which 
the  Universe  was  builded. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  In  regard  to  the  Third  Sphere,  if  I  understand  it  right, 
it  seems  it  is  moving  or  has  been  recently,  that  which  is  going 
to  be  brought  in  great  new  inventions. 

A.  Yes,  they  catch  a  glimpse  of  what  is  in  Immensity;  just 
as  you  would  be  looking  spiritually  into  the  future. 

Q.  In  1933  these  masters  who  will  use  that  will  come  to 
earth  and  take  up  with  physical? 

A.     Yes. 

In  my  explanation  to  you  I  do  not  wish  to  have  any  division 
of  man's  mind.  I  only  wish  you  to  understand  that  I  utilize 
only  the  highest  spiritual  faculties;  sometimes  I  utilize  only  the 
aura  of  the  spirit  of  our  interpreter;  that  aura  is  sensitized  to  its 
highest  degree  and  it  belongs  wholly  to  the  spirit;  the  spirit 
transposes  it  into  the  brain,  producing  the  words. 

76 


Q.     Marcus,  is  that  why  I  do  not  memorize?    (Mrs.  L.) 
A.     Certainly;  you  have  only  utilized  the  aura  of  the  sense 

of  the  soul  and  it  is  the  closest  relationship  between  spirit  and 

human  expression  that  can  be  produced. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  some  time  how  it  occurred  that  you 
were  first  attracted  to  place  into  any  form  this  knowledge? 
There  must  have  been  some  great  reason. 

A.  Certainly.  We  live  and  exist  before  earth  is.  And  in 
that  we  gather  a  thought  that  when  earth  is  created  and  spirit  is 
held  within  its  materialistic  placing,  not  form,  then  we  are  per- 
fectly conscious  of  coming  to  that  spirit  and  holding  converse 
with  it,  expressing  to  it  that  it  may  place  within  the  earth's  con- 
ditions its  own  experiences.  But  if  you  wish  me,  some  time  I 
will  tell  you  what  occurred,  what  promise  we  made  and  how  we 
knew  who  was  to  do  this  and  under  what  conditions  it  was  to  be 
done. 

Before  I  finish  I  will  try  to  place  for  you  some  thought  of  the 
Universes  in  Immensity  that  hold  the  wonderful  species  of  plant 
life,  the  growth  of  trees  that  the  earth  only  holds  a  slight  re- 
flection of.  All  this  must  come  as  we  arrange  the  vibrations 
for  it. 

I  am  very  busy  these  days  for  I  am  very  sure  you  expect 
me  to  have  this  perfectly  correct.  So  when  I  take  a  glimpse  into 
Immensity  1  usually  follow  very  closely  that  I  may  get  it  cor- 
rect for  you. 


77 


LESSON  VIII 

THAT  WHICH  IS  WITHIN  IMMENSITY, 
ITS  PURPOSE  AND  ITS  THOUGHT. 

MARCUS— September  4,  1919 

That  you  may  make  the  explanations  that  I  am  to 
give  you,  as  pleasant  as  possible  and  that  they  may  have 
no  thought  with  regard  to  a  denseness  or  a  confined  con- 
dition that  when  it  is  read  it  will  not  express  what  is  de- 
sired, we  will  make  it  as  plain  as  we  can. 

Immensity,  as  I  have  told  you,  must  be  measured  by 
the  brain  of  man  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  advanced 
thought  he  may  have ;  therefore,  when  I  say  that  Immen- 
sity has  many  great  central  points,  that  would  express  to 
man  the  thought  that  he  can  at  least  measure  it  in  some 
way  and  understand  the  many  things  there  are  within  it. 

In  these  divisions  or  centers,  there  are  always  many 
who,  if  not  studying,  are  unable  to  give  a  great  deal  of 
information.  Knowledge  of  course,  is  the  great  power 
that  gives  to  spirit  its  manner  and  way  of  penetrating 
into  heights  beyond  which  we,  as  spirit,  often  pass, 
though  we  seldom  afterwards  come  close  enough  unless 
we  find  a  highly  charged  sensitive  center  to  enter  into. 
The  nearest  approach  to  earth  that  Immensity  holds  are 
the  centers  whereby  Units  are  placed  and  at  intervals 
they  are  changed.  These  Units  hold  all  knowledge  of, 
not  only  forces,  but  vibrations,  and  also  the  powers  of 

73 


creating  all  manners  and  forms  of  what  you  would  call 
Electric  and  magnetic  movements.  That  they  who  have 
not  studied,  as  far  as  you  may  understand  me,  I  will  place 
it  in  this  simplified  way.  These  great  centers  would,  if 
upon  the  earth,  be  called  Universities  or  Colleges.  They 
are  very  large,  often  covering  many  acres  of  space. 
Around  and  about  them  are  placed,  for  the  convenience 
of  all  who  wish  to  investigate  and  develop  the  great  facul- 
ties of  spirit,  the  most  wonderful  mechanism  for  use  and 
experiments  of  all  kinds.  To  be  sure  they  are  always 
utilized  in  a  most  perfect  manner  and  are  placed  with 
everything  that  can  be  known  by  spirit  for  such  a  pur- 
pose. For  an  example :  we  will  tell  you  in  this  way :  that 
the  great  electrical  forces  of  light  can  be  reduced  to  a  very 
small  minimum,  or  they  can  be  raised  to  the  highest  de- 
gree of  immensity  and  power.  This  is  where  the  knowl- 
edge of  spirit  exceeds  the  knowledge  of  man  within  earth, 
for  man  has  never  been  able  to  utilize  and  develop  a 
power  that  by  the  fraction  of  an  instant  he  could  do  this 
that  I  am  telling  you.  Under  these  circumstances,  they  do 
not  measure  by  the  same  degrees  that  you  do ;  they  utilize 
what  is  called  as  Fatoumun  light.  This  has  the  power  of 
measuring  great  expanses  or  the  most  minute  fraction. 
There  are  other  centers  where  they  are  taught  with  re- 
gard to  the  creation  of  every  form  that  has  ever  been  in 
existence,  matters  not  whether  it  is  animal  or  atmic  or 
unit  or  whatever  it  is  that  is  needful  to  hold  a  knowledge. 
In  the  creation  of  these  forms  they  bring  together  from 
out  of  creative  zones  the  powers  of  dimensions.  For  an 
example:  if  it  is  required  to  create  and  separate  atoms 
into  fractions  equal  to  the  sands  of  the  sea,  they  have  an 
instrument  by  which  this  is  done.  It  is  no  larger  than  the 
point  of  a  small  needle;  it  is  hung  upon  a  disc  of  pure, 
clear  atmosphere ;  this  atmosphere  is  congealed  by  the  use 
of  adzfouns,  which  has  the  power  of  compressing  atmos- 

79 


phere  into  what  you  would  call  solidity.  It  can  be  used 
in  this  disc  as  thick  as  three  feet  or  it  can  be,  if  used  for 
other  purposes,  about  as  thick  as  fine  paper.  This  abso- 
lutely gives  the  measurement  of  these  small  particles. 
Others  are  larger  needles  placed  upon  larger  size  discs 
with  greater  thickness.  They  revolve  very,  very  rapidly, 
more  so  than  any  rapidity  of  movement  that  the  earth  has 
ever  known.  You  will  find  these  very  easily  controlled 
as  they  only  press  the  point  like  a  finger  upon  a  small 
lever  and  that  instant  regulates  the  movement  of  these 
discs. 

They  also  have  another  center  where  Units  are 
brought  together  from  out  of  the  great  Equalateral  Zones, 
not  equalateral  according  to  astronomical  calculation,  but 
equalateral  because  it  is  known  from  this  latitude  where 
the  substance  of  these  Units  is  to  be  attracted  from,  they 
hold  what  is  known  as  an  unending  source  of  quantity,  as 
you  would  say.  These  centers  attract  with  great  power- 
ful magnetic  squares  about  the  size  and  dimension  of 
sixty  feet  to  the  square.  If  the  Units  are  to  be  created 
before  coming  close  enough  to  the  earth,  this  fraction  is 
reduced  within  a  measurement  of  about  25  feet  in  width 
and  into  it  is  placed  this  great  quantity  from  the  equa- 
lateral condition  and  they  are  then  formed  into  shape. 
Some  of  them  are  rolled,  if  I  may  use  such  a  word.  And 
in  the  rolling  is  placed  the  knowledge  that  is  to  be  used— 
whether  it  is  to  be  used  in  one  year  or  25  thousand  years, 
it  does  not  matter.  This  is  rolled  very  tightly  and  then 
the  Unit  is  placed  around  it.  Other  Units  only  hold  sym- 
bols within  them  that  hold  a  record  of  any  age  that  may 
be  given  Universes  or  Heavens.  I  am  speaking  of  this 
now  as  the  effect  of  conditions  that  the  earth  holds  very 
little  with  regard  to.  But  we  will  come  closer  to  that 
as  we  finally  give  you  a  thought  of  what  is  within  Im- 
mensity. 


The  creation  of  Universes,  of  course,  comprises  a  great 
portion  within  Immensity,  but  as  there  were  many  other 
conditions,  had  to  be  created  first,  we  will  leave  them 
until  later. 

As  far  as  I  can  procure  a  knowledge,  Zones  were 
created  first  in  order  that  they  should  be  filled  with  that 
which  should  be  needful  in  any  creation  that  would  fol- 
low. These  Zones  were  in  what  you  would  call  Finite 
Etheric  Light,  which  means  light  that  has  not  been  used 
for  any  other  purpose;  not  finite  as  far  as  the  earth  is 
concerned.  These  Zones  were  then  placed  in  position. 
Some  of  them  were  many  thousands  of  miles  in  circum- 
ference, while  others  measured  a  few  thousand  feet.  They 
were  not  very  wide  as  far  as  the  bands  of  them  were  con- 
cerned. In  the  first  creation  they  were  without  color,  but 
as  they  drew  closer  to  the  earth  they  were  made  with 
many  colors,  each  color  representing  the  expression  of 
life  which  would  be  drawn  from  them.  If,  however,  the 
life  that  was  to  be  drawn  from  them  did  not  correspond 
with  spirit  life,  it  was  only  the  life  of  form  or  the  creative 
conditions  of  other  things.  These  Zones  were  then  filled, 
as  I  have  been  told  by  they  of  the  spirit  condition  who 
understood  the  placing  within  them  of  these,  whether 
they  were  light  or  force  or  movement,  even  at  times, 
action,  but  not  as  humanity  would  call  it,  and  other  for- 
mation entirely  different.  It  is  with  some  difficulty  that 
I  have  been  able  to  gather  together  sufficient  to  place 
within  your  words  a  way  that  would  be  understandable. 

After  the  creation  of  these  Zones,  began  the  creation 
and  separating  into  various  forms  what  was  afterwards 
known  as  the  High  Places — High  Places  meaning  in  the 
relationship  of  spirit,  that  which  was  presided  over  by 
the  highest  degree  of  spirit  light,  knowledge  and  con- 
sciousness. The  purpose  of  such  an  arrangement  would 
be  in  comparison  to  the  highest  conditions  where  man 

81 


gathers  together  that  nobility  of  thought,  unselfish  de- 
sires and  a  seeking  of  service  to  each.  If  you  would  in- 
tensify this  in  the  highest  degree  you  would  have  some 
idea  of  what  these  places  were  for  spirit.  Many  of  those 
who  gathered  there  were  not  known  as  earth  created 
spirits,  although  I  have  learned  that  there  have  been  some 
of  they  who  come  to  earth  for  the  purpose  of  giving  a 
higher  knowledge  and  also  of  developing  many  spirits 
with  whom  they  come  in  contact  that  come  for  spiritual 
knowledge,  and  not  for  physical  experiences.  These 
places  occupy,  as  I  have  been  told,  very  closely  what  is 
known  as  the  rim  of  the  Great  Heavens.  Then  the  rims 
which  I  have  heard  of,  of  which  there  are  three,  belong 
not  to  the  creation  of  Immensity,  but  belonged  before  Im- 
mensity was  created.  I  have  never  been  able  so  far  to 
procure  a  knowledge  of  their  creation. 

We  now  come  to  the  thought  of  the  conferring  or  the 
placing  of  those  who  went  into  these  High  Places,  before 
all  great  creations,  as  I  have  understood,  they  gathered 
there  to  utilize  Infinite  knowledge  and  place  within  Im- 
mensity these  great  creations.  For  an  example:  When 
the  High  Heavens  were  created  there  was  a  special  nebula 
placed  and  they  of  the  heights,  as  we  will  say,  were  gath- 
ered together  in  order  that  they  might  specialize  and  place 
something  worthy  the  consciousness  the  Father  would 
place  within  it,  as  you,  if  you  were  to  write  a  letter  or 
dictate  a  letter,  would  place  within  it  the  highest  expres- 
sion of  your  thought  that  you  have  but  you  would  have 
to  have  the  preparation.  If  you  did  it  yourself,  you  had 
to  have  the  articles  required  to  transfer  your  thought 
upon  the  paper.  If  some  one  else  did  it,  they  would  have 
to  be  supplied  with  material.  So  it  was  the  work  of  these 
great  conditions  to  know  that  these  nebula  were  prepared 
with  the  required  conditions  and  material  for  the  con- 
sciousness of  the  Infinite.  This  nebula  was  absorbable, 


and  as  I  have  been  told,  after  the  first  great  consciousness 
was  placed  within  it  and  the  Great  Heavens  unrolled  into 
Immensity,  the  nebula  was  absorbed  through  what  is 
known   as    the    Breath    of    Zonic    Thought,    and    Zonic 
Thought  as  I  have  been  told,  is  positively  the  intelligence 
within  each  Zone,  each,  being  connected  so  closely  with 
the  knowledge  and  consciousness  of  the  Infinite,  stands  in 
a  very  high  degree  within  Immensity.    In  order  that  this 
should  be  understood  plainly,  it  would  require  me  to  say 
many  things ;  one  of  them  would  be,  that  in  order  to  un- 
derstand, that  when  Zones  began  to  move,  as  you  would 
say,  in  circles,  you  can  often  see  an  expression  of  thought 
given  forth  as  if  you  turned  the  leaves  of  a  book  and  could 
see  written  therein,  in  words,  a  knowledge  that  hereto- 
fore  had   been   unknown   to   yourself.     Ofttimes    spirit 
watches  for  this  that  it  may  give  unto  them  from  the 
Father,  that  which  had  been  held  as  if  unrevealed  before. 
In  some  Zones  this  intelligence  is  greater  than  others 
according  to  the  power  of  its  movement.    This  may  seem 
strange  to  you,  but  to  spirit  it  is  very  easily  understood. 
The  next  creation  as  I  have  been  told,  was  the  crea- 
tion of  the  Unknown  Lands,  and  I  have  thought  a  great 
deal  in  regard  to  this,  as  it  is  the  only  place  within  Im- 
mensity that  is  called  "Lands."     There  are  what  you 
would  call  oceans  and  seas  of  light  and  there  are  bodies 
of  light  that  would  look  at  first  to  spirit  as  if  they  were 
islands ;  yet  all  of  these  conditions  are  not  as  solid  as  the 
material  of  earth,  yet  they  are  as  easily  used  and  can  be 
adapted  to  the  use  of  spirit  without  any  difficulty  in  any 
way.     However,  these  are  called  "Lands"  and  they  are 
called  "Unknown  Lands"  and  in  questioning,  I  under- 
stand this  to  be  the  reason :  they  were  to  lie  in  such 
quantities  and  also  they _were  to  be  occupied  by  many 
thousands  and  millions  of  they  who  were  to  retain  the 
highest  development  of  Infinite  Thought  that  could  be 

83 


transferred  to  spirit  and  held  for  thousands  and  millions 
of  ages.  I  do  not  quite  comprehend  the  full  meaning  of 
this  thought  for  it  is  impossible  for  me  to  do  so  and  then 
re-express  it,  but  I  have  given  you,  as  far  as  I  can,  that 
you  may  comprehend  me. 

These  Unknown  Lands  hold  also  great  powers  that, 
as  it  has  been  told  me,  have  never  thus  far  been  opened 
up  for  the  knowledge  of  any  spiritual  formation.  The 
only  great  condition  through  which  nebulae  form  had  to 
be  utilized  was  the  creation  of  what  was  known  as  the 
power  of  expansion.  In  this  I  have  to  leave  you  to  study 
and  question  many  things,  for  expansion  does  not  confine 
itself  to  one  particular  form,  thought,  creation  or  any 
condition  or  place.  This  power  of  expansion  can  be  util- 
ized by  spirit  for  any  experience  necessary,  of  which  you 
will  find,  as  you  come  closer  and  closer  into  the  thought 
of  spirit,  is  very  great  indeed.  I  have  often  thought  as  I 
have  been  within  the  earth,  as  well  as  in  the  spirit,  that 
this  expansion  could  be  utilized  within  the  earth  in  a  very 
great  degree  and  it  would  change  many  of  the  old  ideas 
that  have  a  tendency  to  contract  instead  of  expand.  How- 
ever, as  I  am  not  supposed  to  be  any  great  judge  of  the 
power  or  use  of  the  Infinite,  I  must  leave  this  as  it  is. 

My  next  great  experience  in  the  nebulic  condition  was 
the  creation  of  great  Illumined  Worlds.  They  do  not  be- 
long in  any  way  or  hold  any  position  that  is  occupied  or 
will  be  occupied  by  the  earth.  They  were  to  form  what 
was  known  as  the  outlying  condition  of  Immensity.  They 
were  so  powerful  as  they  passed  out  of  the  nebula,  so 
rapid  in  their  movement,  and  their  expansion  was  so  great 
that,  they  have  told  me,  the  reflection  of  one  alone  formed 
a  compass  of  light  over  thirty  millions  of  miles  square. 
Of  their  number  they  were  almost  innumerable.  I  give 
you  this  that  you  at  least  will  absorb  a  slight  knowledge 
of  what  the  outlying  condition  of  Immensity  is.  This 

84 


gives  Immensity  all  the  powerful  light  required  for  its 
illumination.  I  do  not  know  if  these  worlds  are  inhabited 
by  spirit  or  no,  and  I  have  still  this  thought  in  mind  for 
us  both,  that  when  we  are  free  enough  we  can  take  a  voy- 
age of  investigation  and  procure  a  knowledge  of  their 
existence  for  ourselves.  Once  in  a  while  I  know  you  will 
excuse  me  if  I  speak  plainly  and  as  if  I  still  had  a  thought 
of  human  life  as  when  I  come  in  contact  I  feel  and  realize 
how  closely  we  must  come  to  one  another  in  order  that  I 
can  be  understood.  And  if  you  will  stop  and  think  a 
moment  you  will  know  that  even  my  name  has  much  to 
do  with  the  marking  out  many  things  and  supplying 
many  places  with  my  trowel  and  my  plummet,  that  hith- 
erto have  been  as  unexplored  lands  waiting  for  the  torch 
light  to  show  to  they  who  are  travelers  the  long  distance 
roads  the  way  in  which  they  can  go  with  no  danger  to 
themselves  and  also  with  a  kindly  thought  that  there 
would  be  those  who  would  gladly  go  with  us  if  they  had 
the  opportunity. 

I  am  trying  in  this  explanation  to  make  it  as  pleasant 
and  plain  as  I  can  and  if  occasionally  I  place  within  it 
some  thought  of  earth,  or  the  spheres  I  think  there  will  be 
those  who  would  wish  to  look  upon  it  that  would  feel 
more  kindly  toward  both  of  us.  In  coming  close  to  the 
earth  there  is  one  thought  that  has  never  been  given  to 
you  that  I  know  of  at  the  present  that  would  explain  to 
you  a  little  something  with  regard  to  how  easy  or  how 
difficult  it  is  for  us  to  place  a  knowledge  of  this  kind. 
First,  to  make  it  easy  we  often  find  there  are  those  who 
are  especially  appointed  to  make  every  condition  possible 
for  us,  then  it  is  our  place  to  see  that  our  knowledge  is  as 
perfect  as  it  is  possible  to  put  it  together.  At  other  times 
if  in  another  way  it  would  be  very  difficult  and  we  would 
find  ourselves  shut  away  as  completely  as  if  you  had  built 
a  high  wall  and  built  it  with  every  precaution  against 
being  torn  down. 

85 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.     What  would  my  name  (George)  signify? 
A.     Your  name  would  be  this:    As  they  who  seek,  seek  light, 
so  must  you  lift  above  all  things  that  which  can  illuminate. 

Q.  Marcus,  when  you  leave  here  and  go  back  to  where  you 
belong,  do  you  still  hold  a  memory  of  earth? 

A.  It  is  quite  necessary  for  me  to  hold  a  memory  of  earth 
until  I  complete  the  consciousness  and  experience  which,  as  you 
must  know,  has  extended  over  a  number  of  years.  I  often  find 
myself,  however  so  absorbed  in  the  life  in  which  I  live  in  the 
spirit  that  the  minor  things  of  earthly  experiences  do  not  interest 
me  as  much,  but  the  great  conditions  of  earth  hold  still  as  inter- 
esting a  place  as  they  ever  did.  But  if  you  will  remember,  in 
your  consciousness  of  Egypt,  that  I  held  only  the  great  condi- 
tions, and,  to  be  sure,  you  must  know  that  that  was  only  a  small 
portion.  If  you  had  added  the  every  day  small  events,  it  would 
have  been  that  much  more.  Memory  of  spirit,  as  far  as  the 
earth  is  concerned,  holds  only  the  grandeur  of  spirit  and  many 
times  spirit  sees  only  the  perfect  condition;  so  the  memory  it 
would  hold  of  the  earth  would  be  the  more  perfect  condition  of 
earth.  Where  I  abide,  I  would  like  to  tell  you  of,  that  you  may 
know  something  of  where  I  love  to  remain.  You  must  under- 
stand, however,  that  our  Universe  from  whence  we  come,  is 
always  the  point  to  which  I  penetrate  first.  It  is  there  that  I 
always  wait  any  message  that  may  be  transferred  to  me  from 
any  place  within  my  knowledge  of  spirit  existence.  It  is  there 
that  I  offer  my  service  and  also  my  worship,  each  one  having 
their  own  manner  and  form.  It  is  there  that  I  often  catch  a 
knowledge  of  higher  things;  also  the  direction  in  which  I  can  go 
to  procure  it.  I  often,  however,  drift  from  place  to  place 
wherever  the  greatest  attraction  of  consciousness  is  for  me. 
I  find  it  very  beautiful  indeed.  I  will  tell  you,  however,  this,  that 
yesterday  I  waited  within  the  confines  of  the  orbit  of  the  spheres, 
I  was  attracted  by  the  wonderful  flashes  of  light  that  are  always 
a  signal  that  some  one  from  some  of  the  Universes  is  needed. 
However,  we  have  a  special  signal  for  each  universe;  ours  is  a 
square  doubled,  in  the  flashing,  and  so  I  proceeded  to  go  and  see 
if  I  was  needed,  and  there  I  received  a  message  that  you  required 
me  to  be  here  at  an  earlier  hour.  As  you  know,  I  do  not  enter 
the  spheres,  and  if  some  time  I  would  give  you  a  little  of  my 
experience  in  my  way  I  do  not  think  it  would  be  out  of  place 

86 


even  in  our  thought  of  Immensity.  I  found  the  message  brought 
me  very  close  to  the  thought  of  earth,  and,  in  order  that  you  may 
understand,  there  flashed  for  one  single  moment  into  my  knowl- 
edge of  spirit  everything  that  I  had  ever  known  with  regard  to 
the  earth. 

Q.     Have  you  finished  all  your  work  in  the  spheres? 

A.  Yes,  until  they  are  changed;  then  I  have  something  to 
do.  But  as  far  as  the  spirit  is  concerned  at  the  present,  I  have 
finished  my  work  there. 

Q.  Marcus,  how  many  does  it  take  to  prepare  a  condition 
that  makes  it  easy  for  you  to  place  a  knowledge? 

A.  I  am  going  to  tell  you  that  in  the  experience  of  placing 
our  consciousness  of  Egypt,  there  was  never  less  than  nine  and 
I  have  never  known  anything  greater  than  48  at  any  one  time. 


LESSON  IX 

OUR  FIRST  VOYAGE  WITHIN 
IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— November  6,  1919 

To  place  together  two  quantities  in  order  that  they 
may  make  an  equalivant  (equivalent),  equal  in  force  and 
power  that  is  double  of  that  one  quantity,  may  seem  to  be 
what  my  lesson  will  hold  for  you.  In  the  equalization  of 
two  great  powers  of  Immensity  you  will  find  them  in 
their  unity  absolutely  unequaled.  But  as  I  told  you  be- 
fore, we  are  striving  to  make  this  so  that  others  may  read 
it  and  enjoy  it,  and  that  they  will  not  feel  that  it  belongs 
wholly  to  those  who  seek  only  the  science  of  the  thought, 
and  that  it  is  far  beyond  the  ordinary  student.  So  tonight 
I  want  to  divide  our  great  thought  of  Immensity  into  two 
equal  parts  and  then  place  them  together  that  we  may 
have  a  thought  with  regard  to  the  many  conditions  which 
are  within  Immensity. 

First,  for  the  practical  ones,  I  will  say  that  in  Im- 
mensity there  are  many  pathways  or  roadways  over 
which  all  can  travel.  You  can  choose  any  of  them.  You 
can  travel  fast  or  slow.  Along  every  one  of  them,  sta- 
tioned at  intervals,  are  many  groups  of  what  are  known 
as  places  of  observation,  places  of  holy  study,  places 
where  men  and  women,  as  they  have  taken  upon  them- 
selves the  finality  of  many  things  which  earth  held,  and, 
passing  on  into  Immensity,  find  themselves  ready  and 


equal  to  enjoy  and  study  still  farther  the  great  works  of 
a  power  which  the  mind  of  man  says  no  consciousness  is 
strong  enough  to  interpret. 

The  roadways  that  lead  into  the  heights  always  hold 
within  them  many  great  masters,  each  one  adapted  to 
the  portions  necessary  for  you  to  study ;  while  others  seek 
to  guide  and  direct  you  into  the  great  consciousness  of 
which  I  have  told  you.  There  are  always  byways  upon 
which  you  can  travel  and  make  your  way,  as  it  were, 
amidst  people  and  places,  regarding  which  I  do  not  think 
spirit  has  ever  explained  before. 

Some  of  them  I  found  held  perfect  etheric  bodies  and 
were  utilizing  powers  that  absolutely  sustained  new  crea- 
tions within  Immensity.  If  it  was  light  that  was  needed, 
they  easily  utilized  this  power  and  threw  out  what  you 
would  call  long  lines  or  rays  of  light.  These  were  sent 
always  from  some  great  center,  this  center  attracting,  as 
it  would,  through  the  avenues  they  controlled,  by  the 
force  of  their  own  spirit.  I  watched  one  or  two  of  these 
conditions  and  I  was  attracted  by  a  peculiar  formation  of 
light  which  did  not  seem  to  dissolve  or  separate.  It 
resembled  a  quartz-like  formation  in  long  strands,  like 
you  would  thread  uneven  particles  together.  It  was 
clear,  however.  It  seemed  to  be  suspended  in  various 
directions  above  where  I  passed.  I  began  to  question  and 
was  told  that  there  was  a  certain  force  called  "dimetric 
force"  which  they  utilized,  and  they  took  and  consolidated 
ether  with  the  atmosphere  that  lay  around  them,  and  thus 
molded  it  around  this  force  until  such  time  as  it  should 
be  needed  for  the  new  creations  within  Immensity.  Al- 
though it  was  peculiar  in  form,  still  it  added  and  formed 
a  beautiful  archway  in  many  places. 

I  remained  some  time  with  the  inhabitants  of  this 
place.  I  found  they  were  free  to  go  and  come,  and  their 
method  of  movement  was  very  light,  although  they  had 

89 


for  their  use  sometimes  a  peculiar  machine,  as  you  would 
call  it.  It  was  made  of  innumerable  threads  of  light 
woven  together  like  a  net  and  in  it  were  placed  couches 
covered  with  many  silken  robes — when  they  needed  to 
use  them.  I  have  seen  as  many  as  a  hundred  forms  within 
it.  Then  at  one  end  was  placed  one  of  these  irregular 
quartz  strands  and  the  dimetric  force  was  attracted  and 
went  through  each  mesh  of  the  machine.  By  it  they  trav- 
eled. It  rose  slowly  to  a  great  height  and  traveled  very 
rapidly  through  the  ether  of  Immensity.  I  was  invited 
to  make  a  journey  in  one  of  these  and  I  felt  as  if  it  would 
be  a  pleasure  to  explain  it  to  you  some  time. 

I  asked  in  regard  to  what  it  was  composed  of.  They 
informed  me,  very  pleasantly,  that  the  meshes  were  made 
of  zonic  atoms  that  had  become  deteriorated  for  the  use 
of  what  was  originally  the  intention  of  the  masters ;  and 
they  understood  this  peculiar  force,  and  they  took  them 
and  wove  them  together,  and  found  them  very  light,  yet 
very  strong  and  able  to  bear  whatever  was  placed  upon 
them. 

In  our  travel  we  found  many  peculiar  circles  in  the 
atmosphere  around  and  within  Immensity.  Some  of 
them  resembled,  as  it  were,  great  circles  like  blue  ether; 
while  others  were  gray ;  some,  however,  were  rosy  white 
and  a  few  of  them  were  purple.  Sometimes  they  covered 
a  large  area.  Upon  my  asking  why  they  were  within  Im- 
mensity, they  answered  my  question  in  this  manner: 
These  are  what  are  known  as  the  great  supply  stations 
for  any  who  are  experimenting  along  new  lines  that  have 
not  been  used  by  the  masters  of  the  Universes.  I  ques- 
tioned still  farther,  as  I  was  more  than  interested  in  such 
conditions,  and  they  gave  me  this  thought,  and  1  hope  you 
will  not  feel  that  it  is  strange.  They  said,  do  you  not 
know  that  when  it  is  ready  we  expect  that  there  will  be 
wonderful  creations  and  we  must  be  prepared  to  under- 
go 


stand  how  to  use  them  as  far  as  it  is  possible.  We  have 
penetrated  within  these  Circles,  but  we  find  many  of  them 
hold  that  which  we  cannot  comprehend,  or  use. 

In  speaking  of  these  conditions  I  would  like  to  have 
you  know  that  these  inhabitants,  with  their  etheric  bodies, 
were  very  perfect,  and  in  their  intelligence,  even  as  spirit, 
they  were  remarkable.  We  were  always  greeted  very 
pleasantly  by  those  of  the  Universe  if  we  stopped  long 
enough  to  come  in  contact  with  them.  They  ofttimes 
found  it  needful  that  there  should  be  music — such  won- 
derful harmonies !  They  oft  went  to  what  are  known  as 
great  islands  in  the  Sea  of  Light  within  Immensity.  Here 
we  often  found  various  forms  of  magnificent  growth  of 
what  you  would  call  trees  or  plant  life ;  ofttimes  some  of 
these  islands  would  have  what  is  known  to  man  as  the 
submarine  growth ;  it  has  a  semblance  of  what  the  sea  has 
for  food,  more  delicate,  perhaps,  yet  available  at  all  times. 
Also  I  saw  nothing  in  all  this  that  would  be  in  any  way 
misformed  or  out  of  proportion.  We  also  saw  many 
beautiful  fruit  trees,  if  such  a  condition  can  be  used, 
although  you  would  find  their  substance  was  always  clear 
and  unfading.  At  times  they  would  gather  fruits  and 
seemingly  partake  of  them.  If  we  would  say  this  to  man 
he  would  think  it  would  not  be  needful ;  but  if  the  great 
Creator  gave  the  earth  a  reflection  of  what  is  within  Im- 
mensity, surely  the  original,  even  in  its  wonderful  beauty, 
was  supplied  either  for  use  or  otherwise,  by  spirit,  for  all 
purposes  needful. 

Among  the  number  with  whom  I  traveled  was  a  spirit 
who  in  his  grandeur  and  strength  of  thought  seemed  to 
be  far  in  advance  of  the  others  and  he  answered  many 
questions,  such  as  to  why  we  went  to  such  a  tremendous 
height.  His  reply  was  this :  "In  this  height  is  prepared 
the  transposition  of  atmospheric  force  and  we  find  it 
more  beautiful  for  our  travel."  However,  we  went  much 

91 


lower  in  order  that  I  might  see  the  effect  of  many  of  the 
light  Universes  and  their  movements  as  they  passed 
through  Immensity.  I  have  ofttimes,  since  I  had  a  physi- 
cal body,  seen  the  movement  of  many  vessels,  but  the 
movement  of  these  Universes  in  their  immensity  was  the 
most  magnificent  spectacle  for  you  to  imagine. 

One  of  the  most  peculiar  things  I  saw  that  claimed  my 
attention  was  in  the  form  of  a  half  globe  which  seemed 
to  change  color  as  it  floated  around  us.  I  asked  what  it 
was,  as  it  would  appear  and  disappear,  sometimes  larger, 
sometimes  smaller.  This  one  answered  me  in  this  wise : 
"That  is  what  we  call  the  Globical  Messenger,  and  if  you 
will  look  you  will  see  there  is  someone  within  it."  I 
looked  and  I  saw  there  was  within  it  one  who  had  an 
etheric  form,  and  there  seemed  to  be  near  him  a  peculiar 
coil  of  very  fine  threads.  At  times  as  he  signalled  to  Uni- 
verses or  to  others  who  were  traveling  in  like  manner  or 
passing  through,  as  spirit  often  does,  without  any  appar- 
ent force,  we  would  see  him  changing  color  by  simply 
pressing  these  wires  within  what  seemed  to  be  a  very 
small  cylinder.  At  one  end  of  it  was  a  small  handle  or 
button. 

I  asked  how  we  could  recognize  the  message,  so  he 
gave  me  one  from  this  Messenger.  First,  his  signal  was 
the  color  of  blue  and  contained  within  it  were  three  sym- 
bols ;  when  read  it  was  like  unto  this :  "How  long  will 
you  remain  searching  for  Truth?"  These  symbols  spread 
before  me  and  absolutely  held  these  words  written  in  the 
old  Roman  characters.  I  asked  that  I  might  have  an- 
other message,  and  written  for  your  pleasure,  came  three 
symbols  in  red  and  white.  The  first  one  was  like  this: 
"Through  the  power  of  obedience,  strength  of  truth  be- 
comes a  foundation."  Within  the  white  one  was  this: 
"Unto  thee,  as  spirit,  comes  the  joy  and  the  glory  of  a 
higher  truth,  through  the  majesty  of  thy  Infinite  Crea- 


tor."  The  words  were  spelled  in  the  formation  of  the 
letters  used  by  you  at  the  present. 

How  long  we  traveled  I  could  not  be  conscious  of,  as 
the  whole  of  it  was  so  full  of  beauty  and  comradeship  I 
cared  not  how  long  we  were  together.  It  was  not  that  all 
of  the  time  was  taken  for  these  things,  for  amidst  many 
of  the  conditions  of  the  Universes  where  we  staid,  we 
were  shown  mighty  things  and  we  were  also  shown  the 
conscious  thought  of  the  use  of  the  many  new  conditions 
that  will  be  utilized  by  those  who  shall  inhabit,  not  only 
Immensity,  but  also  the  great  system  that  will  surround 
the  New  Earth. 

Gladly  did  I  follow  out  all  of  these  things,  hoping  that 
I  might  place  them  that  all  could  understand  me,  and  that 
they  should  know  that  within  Immensity  there  are  all 
things  for  spirit,  even  though  seemingly,  as  far  as  the 
earth  is  concerned,  they  may  not  be  strong  enough  to 
penetrate  into  any  of  the  conditions. 

I  am  very  glad  you  insisted  upon  having  my  words  as 
I  gave  them  unto  you,  the  beauty  of  that  which  was  writ- 
ten as  it  goes  forth  to  others,  is  the  manner  in  which  I 
have  placed  it.  If  it  is  changed  or  separated,  then  it  is  not 
the  work  of  spirit,  but  the  work  of  man,  who  modifies  and 
deteriorates,  instead  of  lifting  it  into  spiritual  heights,  for 
which  it  was  intended.  Such  is  the  work  that  is  within  it, 
producing  as  you  see,  even  in  the  beginning,  a  strength 
which  will  not  allow  the  mind  of  man  to  separate  the  Laws 
of  the  Father  and  make  them  the  Laws  of  man.  How- 
ever, we  have  seen  that  it  is  properly  placed,  and  there 
will  be  more  than  one  who  will  have  to  study  before  it  is 
finished  sufficiently  to  be  given  forth.  So  the  ship  which 
we  have  filled  full  of  our  cargo  of  consciousness  has  not 
come  in  contact  with  any  high  seas,  but  sailing  forth,  will 
be  ready,  when  it  comes  into  the  outer  port,  to  withstand 
any  storm  it  may  be  called  upon  to  meet.  I  know  it  will 

93 


anchor  in  many  a  pleasant  cove  and  there  hold  enough  of 
the  wonderful  thought  for  the  inhabitants;  it  will  not 
need  ever  to  be  called  back,  as  I  have  prepared  it  perfectly 
for  everything  with  which  it  will  come  in  contact. 

You  may  call  this,  "Our  First  Voyage  Within  Im- 
mensity." 

How  many  voyages  will  you  make  within  Immensity? 
Enough  to  make  it  interesting  to  the  ordinary  student. 


LESSON  X 

WHAT  IS  DEPOSITED  WITHIN 
IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— February  5,  1920 

We  will  gather  together  as  best  we  can  in  this  that  I 
have  brought  to  you  that  it  may  be  known  that  Immen- 
sity holds  an  explanation  of  many  great  questions. 

Measurement  and  Space  within  Immensity  hold  no 
gravitation;  neither  do  they  hold  the  forces  which  pro- 
duce for  spirit  either  heat  or  cold ;  yet  there  is  an  equality 
of  these  forces  which  will  produce  anywhere  and  every- 
where within  Immensity  whatever  may  be  desired  to  pro- 
duce and  place  into  action,  growth,  movement,  force  or 
place. 

I  would  like  you  to  have  a  realization  of  how  the  trans- 
posing of  anything  is  produced.  Taking  in  what  is  known 
as  the  plan  and  building  of  immense  structures  that  are 
within  Immensity,  you  will  not  find  it  necessary  to  have 
any  particular  force  or  power  to  move  or  place  them.  The 
simple  atmospheric  condition  combined  with  etheric  force 
does  the  work  perfectly.  This  is  the  only  way  I  can 
explain  it  to  you  that  you  may  comprehend  it.  Neces- 
sarily there  being  no  gravitation,  the  etheric  force  is  what 
holds  and  places.  When  structures  are  erected  to  what 
you  would  call  a  very  great  height  they  are  absolutely 
adapted  to  the  movement  of  Immensity  and  are  not  dis- 
turbed in  any  way  by  vibrations  within  the  earth. 

95 


You  may  ask  me  why  we  have  structures  of  this  kind. 
If  man  within  the  earth  takes  upon  himself  the  thought  of 
producing  anything  in  a  structural  line  he  does  not  hesi- 
tate to  use  materials  and  plans  that  may  be  suitable  for 
the  building  he  is  to  erect — he  chooses  the  timbering, 
either  stone  or  wood,  that  is  to  form  his  structure.  In 
Immensity,  however,  it  is  utilized  in  another  way.  If  it 
is  chosen  to  use  a  stone  structure,  it  can  very  readily  be 
created  through  any  zonic  force  that  holds  the  substance 
for  such  a  creation.  This  can  be  attracted  by  the  power 
of  spirit-thought ;  ofttimes  a  light  is  used ;  the  intellect  of 
the  Zone  answers,  and  in  a  very  short  time  the  substance 
is  there  for  the  adaptability  of  whatever  they  would  wish 
to  construct.  Very  few  structures  are  built  of  wood,  and 
no  wood  is  used  except  that  which  holds  a  very  strong 
element  of  intelligence.  Many  times,  however,  it  is  com- 
bined with  stone.  This  wood  is  usually  brought  from  the 
same  condition  as  that  which  was  used  in  the  Temple  of 
Solomon.  Silver,  gold,  jewels  and  all  kinds  of  metal  go 
to  form  the  finishing  of  many  of  these  structures.  They 
can  be  created  out  of  light  or  what  is  known  as  water  or 
atmospheric  ether,  which  is  very  prevalent  in  some  por- 
tions of  Immensity.  They  can  be  of  any  color  that  would 
correspond  to  the  thought  of  those  who  were  doing  this 
work.  Ofttimes  you  will  find  the  interior  of  these  struc- 
tures thickly  studded  with  the  most  brilliant  jewels,  car- 
rying out  some  great  symbol  in  their  pattern,  with  even 
the  jewels  themselves  expressing  words  and  thoughts. 

Within  Immensity  you  will  find  all  of  the  conditions 
that  have  been  utilized  within  the  earth.  For  example, 
oxygen  in  all  its  purity  is  here  in  quantities ;  some  of  it  is 
stored,  as  you  would  say,  and  placed  within  a  unit.  Some 
of  these  units  are  deposited  in  places  where  they  will  be 
available,  if  needed.  Nitrogen  also  is  placed  in  a  like  man- 
ner. The  atmosphere  around  your  earth  forms  another 

96 


deposit  within  the  units.  The  preparation  of  these  units 
has  been  the  work  of  masters  ages  and  ages  ago,  still  you 
would  find  them  in  a  complete  condition,  as  there  is  no 
absorption  within  Immensity,  everything  remains  as  at 
first  created  unless  there  is  a  demand  for  an  extra  amount 
of  magnetic,  electric  or  voltalic  force.  This  voltalic  force 
is  not  used  very  much  within  the  earth  in  any  way,  it  is 
used  more  within  the  universes,  and  a  small  portion  of 
the  Illumined  Worlds  has  use  for  it.  Upon  investigating 
I  found  it  was  used  for  the  purpose  of  imprinting  symbols 
or  impressing  words  upon  anything  that  was  to  be  placed 
within  Immensity  for  the  purpose  of  guiding  or  directing 
the  thought  of  spirit. 

Immensity  also  holds  great  deposits  of  that  which  is 
the  origin  of  any  kind  of  an  atom,  as  there  are  many  be- 
sides planetary  atoms.  If  there  is  a  combination  in  this 
deposit  it  is  often  utilized  by  spirit  as  they  seek  to  create 
propelling  forces.  I  will  tell  you  that  you  may  under- 
stand this.  These  atoms  combined  together  produce  a 
peculiar  force.  You  speak  of  the  movements  of  planets 
and  the  earth  as  if  naught  save  the  force  or  momentum  of 
their  own  bodies  keeps  them  in  motion,  or  that  the  move- 
ment within  a  certain  form,  such  as  an  axis,  would  keep 
them  constantly  moving.  That  is  not  correct.  The  move- 
ment of  all  these  bodies  is  always  supplied  with  a  certain 
portion  of  this  voltalic  force  ;  all  except  the  earth  ;  the  sun 
being  supplied,  absolutely  gives  the  earth  its  rotary  move- 
ment. If  there  is  a  great  change  to  be  made  within  Im- 
mensity, such  as  is  occurring  at  the  present,  this  force  is 
used.  It  has  within  it  the  exact  measurement  of  any  dis- 
tance that  any  great  body  would  need  to  use  to  be  moved ; 
and  it  is  done  so  perfectly  that  unless  you  were  one  of  the 
masters  who  was  using  it,  you  would  not  recognize  any 
difference  in  the  spaces  between  them,  not  even  the  frac- 
tion of  a  hair's  breadth.  The  planets  being  supplied  with 

57 


a  portion,  utilize  it  through  light.  The  moon's  surface, 
or  the  side  not  discernible  to  the  earth,  holds  sufficient  of 
it  to  give  it  its  own  illumination.  If,  in  clusters,  the  Il- 
lumined Worlds  have  reached  a  degree  of  spiritual  intel- 
ligence and  it  is  needful  to  separate  or  send  them  into 
other  spheres  of  light,  then  this  force  is  brought  into  use. 
It  forms,  as  I  would  say  to  you  looking  at  it  with  the 
human  eye,  as  if  it  were  a  broad  river  or  roadway  of 
brilliant  light,  in  the  center  of  which  are  moving  spirals, 
some  of  one  color  and  some  of  another  color ;  but  upon 
closer  vision  you  would  find  that  few  of  them  had  any 
color  except  blue.  But  their  movement  and  the  reflection 
of  this  force,  or  light,  produce  the  variation  of  color.  Into 
this  these  Illumined  Worlds  are  attracted,  traveling  a 
certain  distance  or  space  apart,  and  moving  very  rapidly 
they  soon  assume  the  place  assigned  them.  This,  how- 
ever, belongs  to  the  great  development  of  thought,  not 
for  the  mind  of  man  to  understand. 

We  now  come  to  one  of  the  great  questions  of  the 
earth  today,  and  it  is  the  origin  of  what  man  calls  elec- 
tricity. Within  Immensity  electricity  (from  a  spiritual 
standpoint)  is  what  is  known  as  a  high  intelligent  power. 
I  have  to  use  the  word  "power"  that  you  may  understand 
me.  With  spirit,  however,  we  simply  give  it  the  name  of 
Intellectual  Light.  Within  Immensity  it  has  no  particu- 
lar place  assigned  it,  as  it  is  used  in  every  place.  It  is 
intensified,  however,  and  in  universes  and  places  where 
masters  abide,  it  is  known  as  intro-electricity.  Within  it 
are  all  kinds  of  waves,  known  and  unknown  to  man, — 
spiritual  waves,  radio  waves,  intro-zonic  waves.  A  few 
celestial  waves  can  be  discerned  especially  as  they  are 
used  in  the  heights  even  farther  than  universes  have 
reached.  The  rims  of  all  Immensity,  also  the  Heavens, 
and  many  of  the  great  Unit  Universes  are  created  out  of 
what  you  call  electricity.  In  the  beginning,  as  I  have  told 

98 


you,  this  electrical  force  originated  through  the  creation 
of  suns.  The  origin  of  these  suns  was  the  combined 
force  and  the  power  of  Infinite  Light  condensed  into 
form  ;  there  is  no  extinguishing  it  or  inexhaustibility  in  it ; 
there  is  nothing  that  can  exceed  it.  However,  in  the 
creation  of  these  suns,  the  motion  or  movement  was  so 
rapid  that  at  intervals  large  bodies  of  this  Infinite  force 
were  thrown  off.  They  were  susceptible,  however,  to  the 
force  of  the  sun's  light  and  creation  and  remained  closely 
connected.  After  an  interval  of  what  you  would  say  was 
many  millions  of  ages,  these  became  detached.  They 
passed  through  Immensity  and  in  doing  so  became  elon- 
gated; at  first  they  were  circular.  As  they  passed  and 
became  elongated,  their  movement  again  fractionized 
itself  and  they  had  formed  like  wires  or  threads.  These 
were  innumerable.  And  when  masters  were  taught  to  use 
them  they  could  form  anything  they  chose  from  them. 
In  Immensity  electricity  has  no  power  to  destroy  as  is 
done  within  the  earth.  The  reason  of  its  destructive 
power  within  the  earth  is  because  you  combine  it  with 
the  intelligence  of  metals  even  before  it  comes  to  the 
crust  of  the  earth.  Its  attraction  to  the  earth,  as  given 
me,  was  produced  by  the  rim  of  the  atmosphere  congeal- 
ing with  the  light  of  the  sun,  which  brought  it  near 
enough  that  it  could  be  attracted  to  the  earth  through 
metals,  and  man  has  used  it  in  that  way  ever  since.  The 
beginning  of  the  use  of  intro-electricity,  attracting  it 
from  out  of  Immensity,  has  been  done  by  separating  the 
intelligence  of  the  thought-waves  of  the  atmosphere  and 
utilizing  a  portion  of  the  intro-electricity  upon  what  is 
known  as  the  swirl  of  the  intellect  of  these  waves. 

If  you  will  make  the  comparison  you  will  find  that 
everything  I  have  voiced  for  you  from  out  of  Immensity 
has  had  to  come  like  a  flash  of  intellect. 

90 


Another  great  condition  that  earth  has  which  Immen- 
sity has  not,  yet  the  substance  of  it  in  its  origin  is  within 
Immensity,  is  that  which  man  calls  combustion  and 
sound.  In  Immensity  sound  is  only  the  fraction  of  a 
silent  movement;  combustion  is  the  effect  of  receiving 
any  message  in  this  way. 

The  earth  and  its  inhabitants  have  no  consciousness, 
as  yet,  of  what  silence  is,  because  the  earth  has  never 
been  silent,  neither  have  the  great  planets  or  the  orbs  of 
light.  Within  Immensity  great  bodies  can  be  moved,  and 
do  move,  but  the  perfect  silence  by  which  this  is  accom- 
plished is  as  tremendous  as  they  are.  The  reason  is  be- 
cause of  the  perfect  harmony  and  unity  within  Immensity 
which  the  earth  has  never  had  as  yet. 

Now  I  come  to  what  would  be  known  as  the  attraction 
within  Immensity.  This  attraction  is  known  throughout 
Immensity  as  the  power  of  rotation ;  not  what  you  would 
call  rotation  within  the  earth.  To  explain  it,  it  would  be 
like  this, — if  you,  as  a  master,  were  studying  any  par- 
ticular subject,  even  if  it  were  at  a  great  distance,  accord- 
ing to  spirit  vision,  you  create  by  attracting  from  out  of 
Immensity  and  utilizing  anything,  matters  not  what  it  is, 
and  again  rotate  or  bring  before  your  vision  that  which 
you  had  been  studying.  This  power  or  force  is  what  pro- 
duces a  recurrence  in  the  orbit  of  the  earth  of  what  you 
call  the  light  or  the  movement  of  the  light  bodies — such 
as  you  would  say,  the  moon  moving  shows  its  light  at 
certain  times;  the  earth  moving  and  the  sun  moving 
show  at  intervals  of  so  many  hours.  We  would  say  it 
is  the  rotary  movement  that  produces  that  vision  for  man. 

Vision  within  Immensity  has  one  great  thought  con- 
fined within  it.  If  it  is  the  vision  of  spirit,  it  is  very  in- 
tense. If,  however,  it  is  the  vision  of  animal  life,  it  is 
modified  and  is  reduced — they  cannot  see  as  far  as  spirit. 
If  it  is  a  small  portion  of  planetary  form  it  sees  only  as  far 

100 


as  its  light  extends  around  it.  As  to  Illumined  Worlds, 
you  can  place  the  establishment  of  their  vision  about  five 
hundred  miles  around  them. 

I  know  the  question  would  be  asked  as  to  whether 
they  are  inhabited.  Immensity  is  teeming  with  all  life 
of  every  kind  that  is  created.  However,  before  coming 
to  earth  they  live  an  altogether  different  existence  to  that 
which  earth  has  had  at  any  time  for  them.  For  example : 
take  all  the  larger  animals,  they  do  not  exist  or  feed  upon 
the  same  conditions  as  they  do  if  they  occupy  a  form 
upon  earth.  Some  of  them  have  never  been  placed  within 
the  earth.  There  are  great  bodies  of  what  you  call  water 
which  are  full  of  life,  the  same  as  the  earth,  except  they 
are  of  an  entirely  different  formation.  It  follows  on  until 
you  reach  what  is  spirit,  Infinite,  that  is  entirely  different 
and  does  not  exist  the  same  as  the  other  forms  of  life.  You 
will  often  see,  as  spirit,  the  movement  of  a  great  body  of 
light,  if  you  look  closely  you  can  see  it  is  densely  inhab- 
ited— buildings,  structures,  all  forms  of  life,  yet  in  the 
highest  development  possible;  and  in  all  of  it  you  will 
never  see  any  deformity,  any  refuse,  any  ruin,  any  de- 
pleted condition  that  earth  holds;  they  are  always  per- 
fectly light,  alive  and  aglow. 

Now  we  come  to  what  is  known  as  the  minerals.  The 
minerals  are  held  in  their  own  equalized  place.  They  do 
not  need  to  be  run  through  or  purified  by  fires  or  move- 
ments like  they  do  in  the  crust  of  the  earth.  What  you 
call  coal  in  its  earth  deposit,  with  us,  is  like  great  blocks 
of  sunlight.  It  is  held  here  and  as  the  earth  demands  it, 
it  is  transported  through  etheric  forces  and  condensed, 
and  through  the  oxygen  and  nitrogen  it  is  placed  within 
the  earth ;  there  the  movement  of  the  earth  forms  over  it 
what  is  known  as  a  solidified  condition  and  thus  it  re- 
mains until  it  is  available  for  use. 

101 


Other  metals  which  the  earth  has  not,  are  within  Im- 
mensity, such  as  we  call  amalgamated  fire.  It  has  the 
same  chemicalization  as  aluminum  because  it  has  within 
it  a  magnetic  inflow.  It  is  used  within  some  of  the  Uni- 
verses for  the  purpose  of  expansion ;  and  I  will  say  in  a 
plain,  matter-of-fact  manner,  that  if  a  Universe  needs  to 
be  enlarged,  then  they  use  it.  If  man  had  it  he  would  use 
it  as  an  explosive ;  but  within  Immensity  it  does  not  act 
in  such  a  manner,  it  acts  quietly  and  slowly,  and  expands 
whatever  condition  with  which  it  is  needed  to  be  used. 

In  talking  over  these  things  with  you  I  find  myself 
seeking  here  and  there  for  something  with  which  to  make 
a  comparison  for  you,  and  amidst  all  the  great  creations 
of  Immensity  and  its  wonderful  deposits  there  are  so 
many  of  which  the  earth  has  no  consciousness  as  far  as 
the  mind  of  man  is  concerned,  that  I  take  from  out  of  it 
only  a  few.  Spirit  can  use  all  that  is  within  Immensity, 
for  there  are  so  many  new  creations  coming  up ;  and  if  I 
say  to  you  that  spirit  has  to  be  as  busy  in  searching  out 
and  understanding  new  creations  as  man  does  in  studying 
and  understanding  the  wonderful  unfoldment  today,  it 
would  be  a  very  good  comparison. 

I  have  found  a  very  remarkable  condition  existing 
within  what  is  known  as  your  atmospheric  movement.  I 
found  it  so  completely  filled  with  the  passing  of  souls  that 
if  I  should  say  to  you  that  they  are  intensifying  the  intel- 
ligence of  everything  within  the  earth,  I  would  not  be  far 
wrong,  for  they  are  coming  forth  from  every  sphere  that 
surrounds  the  earth ;  many  are  coming  who  have  never 
come  so  close  to  the  earth  in  many,  many  ages.  They  are 
perfectly  pure  in  every  way ;  and  the  spirit  that  controls 
them  has  held  them  for  some  great  purpose  which  is  to  be 
placed  for  the  earth — but  what  that  is  I  do  not  know. 


102 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  Marcus,  can  you  give  us  an  explanation  as  to  the  method 
by  which  intro-electricity  can  take  up  the  intelligence  of  man's 
thought  and  again  transfer  it  into  man's  thoughts? 

A.  I  can  in  a  way,  perhaps  not  quite  as  clearly  as  some 
would  desire,  yet  sufficiently,  I  think,  that  you  can  understand 
me. 

Intro-electricity,  being  utilized  by  masters,  absorbs  the  im- 
pression of  their  intellectuality  (using  that  word  for  every 
thought  perhaps  that  spirit  may  have),  as  it  impresses  itself  upon 
this  electricity  and  the  thought-waves  of  man  passing  with  it,  it 
partakes  of  the  two  great  combinations,  as  man's  thought  first 
has  to  be  imbued  with  the  force  of  his  own  spirit,  as  inanimate 
matter  conveys  nothing.  Under  these  circumstances  intro-elec- 
tricity combining  its  intelligence  with  the  thoughts  of  man,  car- 
ries wherever  there  is  a  man  to  think,  matters  not  whether  the 
words  are  directed  to  him  or  not.  This  will  explain  to  you  why 
it  is  always  a  flash  of  some  character.  Intellect,  with  spirit — 
within  Immensity — is  always  a  flash,  that  is,  both  in  rapidity  and 
in  movement. 

Q.     Is  the  amalgamated  fire  subject  to  expansion? 

A.  It  is  only  for  the  desire  to  have  it  expand.  Necessarily 
as  the  creation  and  the  products  of  their  creation,  you  can  under- 
stand that  there  are  many  times  when  this  is  used;  and  there  are 
many  worlds  and  many  places;  ofttimes  there  is  a  call  for  their 
creations. 

This  expansion  is  like  a  desire.  For  an  example:  if  it  is 
needful  to  have  a  certain  space  to  utilize  for  creation,  it  can  be 
had  almost  immediately.  There  are  no  restrictions.  If  you,  as 
spirit,  desired  to  have  five  thousand  miles  of  space,  you  could 
have  it,  it  would  not  interfere  with  any  one  either  within  the 
Universe  or  outside  of  it.  But  it  is  through  this  condition  that  it 
is  produced. 

Q.  You  say,  Marcus,  this  coal,  looks  to  spirit,  like  blocks 
of  sunlight — that  is  not  solidified  like  our  coal,  is  it? 

A.  No,  sir;  after  it  is  placed  within  the  earth,  then  it  be- 
comes solidified. 

Q.  Then,  when  that  is  done,  is  some  earthly  substance  like 
wood,  used  to  solidify  it? 

103 


A.  No,  not  always;  as  when  wood  is  consumed  sufficiently 
to  combine  with  coal,  it  is  then  carbonated  oxygen. 

Q.     Are  mineral  deposits  made  the  same  way? 

A.  No,  the  minerals  are  a  class  of  their  own,  but  within 
Immensity  they  have  no  weight.  There  is  no  such  thing  as 
weight  or  solidity,  yet  the  strength  of  that  is  there;  for  this  rea- 
son, as  spirit  passes  from  place  to  place  if  there  was  a  solidity  in 
Immensity  they  would  have  to  make  a  detour;  but  as  there  is 
not,  they  can  pass  through;  still  the  strength  is  there,  as  the 
strength  of  spirit  is  still  with  spirit.  In  your  earth  matter  forms 
what  is  an  apparent  solidity  to  you,  there  is  so  much  of  what  we 
call  debris  or  inharmonious  atoms  which  spirit  usually  has  to  do 
away  with  before  penetrating.  For  example:  Unless  this  room 
was  adaptable  for  the  entrance  of  spirit  we  would  have  to  encase 
it  and  make  it  absolutely  clarified  so  there  would  be  no  solidity, 
but  masters  have  produced  the  atmosphere  within  so  that  there 
is  no  solidity  for  us. 

Q.  As  the  earth  is  being  spiritualized,  will  we  be  able  to 
attract  these  conditions  from  out  of  Immensity  to  the  earth? 

A.  No,  these  conditions  will  attract  the  earth  to  them;  that 
is  what  is  doing  this  great  work  at  the  present.  You  are  not 
bringing  to  the  earth,  the  earth  is  going  towards  them;  and  as 
the  earth  reaches  a  formless  condition  you  will  find  that  spirit 
passing  here  and  there  and  everywhere  will  find  it  much  more 
available  than  your  earth  has  been  for  the  use  of  searching  out 
within  Immensity  these  great  conditions.  But  I  find  there  is 
such  a  multiplicity  of  creations  that  upon  searching  for  you,  I 
have  to  say,  that  to  me,  it  is  an  ever  repeated  experience,  as 
with  every  conscious  thought  of  my  spirit. 

Q.     As  they  bring  that  are  we  capable  of  absorbing  it? 

A.  Not  at  the  present.  It  is  like  so  many  times  human  man 
desires  a  name,  a  form,  a  place,  having  no  consciousness  of 
expansion  as  he  views  it.  Supposing  you  and  I  were  traveling 
through  Immensity  and  in  an  average  moment  (human  time)  we 
should  meet  millions  of  masters  exchanging  thought,  do  you 
suppose  for  a  moment  that  we  would  ask  each  one  his  name  or 
would  wish  to  be  introduced?  It  is  with  us,  as  spirit  within 
Immensity,  the  exchange  of  Infinite  thought  as  it  is  developed  in 
one;  name,  place  and  time  do  not  affect  us.  In  other  words,  we 
have  outgrown  such  conditions.  When  we  come  to  earth,  in 
order  that  you  may  know,  we  give  you  our  earthly  name,  or  the 

104 


name  that  we  used  familiarly  in  some  particular  work  or  con- 
sciousness; otherwise  we  would  not  mention  it  in  any  way. 
"Master"  is  one  of  the  thought-words  used  greatly;  it  means,  in 
spirit,  my  friend,  my  comrade — a  greeting.  Within  Immensity, 
in  the  heavens  therein,  you  will  find  the  placing  within  them 
those  who  are  called  by  a  certain  name  may  embrace  many,  with- 
out designation  or  distinction.  In  the  High  Heavens  it  is  the 
House  of  Israel;  there  is  an  individuality  which  is  known  and 
designated;  but  in  Immensity  it  is  always  placed  in  that  way. 


105 


LESSON   XI 


IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— July  3,  1919 

It  has  long  been  my  wish  and  desire  that  I  should 
place  together  for  you  the  knowledge  of  great  things ;  but 
that  man  should  read  it,  it  must  be  simple  and  plain. 
Experience  teaches  us  that  if  intricate  and  scientific  words 
are  placed,  there  are  few  who  would  be  able  to  read  it 
with  an  understanding;  and  that  is  not  my  portion  to  do. 

In  taking  up  this  work  I  am  bringing  in  many 
thoughts  that  are  great,  greater  than  man  hath  known; 
yet  I  will  strive  that  it  shall  be  perfect  and  all  shall  be 
able  to  understand. 

In  the  placing  of  the  thought  man  has  never  become 
conscious  of  Immensity ;  neither  has  he  been  able  to 
place  together  the  fractions  of  Immensity ;  and  I  wouldst 
that  thou  shouldst  have  it  in  a  way  that  at  least  it  can  be 
partially  understood,  if  not  wholly. 

I,  Marcus,  have  striven  to  become  perfectly  conscious, 
as  spirit,  and  yet  hold  a  consciousness  of  earth  sufficient 
to  be  understood.  So  we  will  take  up  this  work  of  Im- 
mensity and  thou  wilt  have  to  call  it  after  such  a  name. 

We  must  first  have  some  thought  of  measurement 
that  the  mind  and  the  thought  may  unify  itself  with  us. 

Immensity,  the  definition  of  which  is  unbounded, 
without  limit,  not  full  and  accessible  that  even  spirit  con- 

106 


sciousness  can  enter  within  it  and  make  use  of  all  that  is 
there. 

In  Immensity  spirit  thought  is  the  predominate  factor 
that  spirit  uses  to  understand  it.  Immensity  can  be 
traversed  by  spirit,  using  spirit  strength,  but  the  mind  of 
man,  unless  developed  to  the  highest  degree,  only  enters 
a  partial  condition  of  Immensity,  and  even  in  the  highest 
consciousness  of  mind,  can  only  traverse  over  certain 
pathways  within  it. 

Immensity  holds,  as  I  from  time  to  time  will  try  to 
explain  to  you,  the  great  creations,  and  if  the  question  is 
to  be  answered,  great  creations  are  where  the  power  of 
the  highest  force  of  creation  is  used.  There  are  other  crea- 
tions that  are  utilized  by  great  masters,  who,  taking  up 
Infinite  force,  create,  but  they  are  not  known  as  great 
creations ;  yet  as  the  narrow,  contracted  power  of  accep- 
tance is  before  us,  we  find  those  who  cannot  make  a  dif- 
ference between  the  two.  There  is  INFINITE  CREA- 
TION; there  is  SPIRITUAL  CREATION;  there  is 
ETHERIC  CREATION  ;  there  is  ILLUMINED  CREA- 
TION. PHYSICAL  CREATION,  however,  has  passed 
beyond  the  plummet  line  and  remains  only  within  phys- 
ical expression. 

In  the  placing  of  Infinite  Creation,  it  encompassed  in 
the  great  placing,  the  outer  line  of  what  is  known  to  us, 
as  spirit,  as  Immensity.  To  the  South,  in  placing  this 
thought,  we  will  say,  lies  the  Unknown  Lands.  To  the 
North,  lies  the  High  Heavens.  To  the  East,  the  Great 
Heavens.  And  to  the  West,  the  Heavens  of  Immensity. 
These  are  the  four  great  points  of  Immensity  as  we  bring 
it  within  the  Circle  of  spirit  consciousness. 

In  the  thought  of  Spirit  consciousness  we  must  ex- 
press it  was  seeking  a  knowledge  of  Immensity.  The 
Unknown  Lands  extend  into  the  outer  rim  of  Immensity 
and  following  it  as  it  is  given  unto  me,  lies  the  great  rim 

107 


of  the  intellectual  force.  There  is  no  thought  that  it  is 
outside  of  Infinite  force  or  creation,  but  we  must  place  it 
thus  in  order  that  we  may  follow  closely  and  keep  as  near 
as  we  can  within  the  comprehensive  power  of  man's 
thought. 

The  High  Heavens,  holding  as  it  does,  the  center  of 
the  great  Circle  around  which  passes  what  is  known  as 
the  Brotherhood  of  Spirit,  and  it  was  here  that  the  first 
great  division  of  Brotherhoods  was  made.  The  first  con- 
dition of  the  High  Heavens  held  no  separateness  on  ac- 
count of  the  use  of  the  great  Circle  of  Leo,  which  is  not 
an  astronomical  placing,  but  is  a  placing  to  designate  the 
conscious  entrance  of  spirit  into  what  would  be  termed 
by  man,  human  consciousness.  You  will  find,  and  then  I 
will  leave  this  thought,  that  human  consciousness  is 
recognizable  in  its  first  creation  within  a  certain  radius  in 
Immensity,  before  it  was  reduced  into  what  would  be 
termed  the  Finite  Consciousness.  We  did  not  call  it 
"human  consciousness,"  but  that  it  may  be  plain  for 
others,  I  designate  it  as  such.  We  called  it,  in  the  con- 
sciousness of  spirit,  the  duality  of  creation,  because  it 
was  created,  but  not  used  at  this  time ;  and  all  creation 
that  holds  within  it  an  inner  creation  not  used,  is  desig- 
nated as  such.  In  placing  this,  I  would  wish  that  it  re- 
main as  it  is,  and  not  be  changed  for  the  purpose  of  util- 
izing any  mentality  that  may  have  assigned  certain 
names,  certain  places  and  certain  conditions  to  explain  it. 

The  separating  into  Brotherhoods  was  the  great  work 
before  Universes  were  created,  for  the  great  creations  of 
the  Infinite  held  these  Heavens  I  have  given  to  you ;  but 
the  exchange  of  spirit-thought  for  a  higher  consciousness 
was  what  this  separateness  was  designed  for.  Then  be- 
gan the  utilization  of  the  power  of  other  creations,  and  it 
was  as  if  Infinite  creation  had  formed  a  nucleus  wherein 
spirit  could  draw  from  it  become  comprehensive  and  cre- 

108 


ate  similarly  with  it.  This  brought  about  the  establish- 
ment of  the  Holy  Brotherhood  within  which  the  Holy 
Masters  moved  and  existed,  they  creating  what  was 
known  as  the  Holy  Places.  As  near  as  I  can  give  it  you, 
there  is  within  Immensity,  within  this  Circle  of  spirit 
consciousness,  no  less  than  21  Holy  Places.  They  that 
lie  within  the  center  of  this  Circle  of  consciousness  hold 
what  is  known  as  the  first  creation  of  spirit,  not  earth 
spirit,  but  spirits  created  for  these  Heavens,  contain  in 
this  center  their  first  creation  and  we,  as  spirit,  call  it, 
the  Holy  of  Holy  Places.  Lying  in  a  star-shaped  figure 
around  it  are  20;  they  are  not  connected  by  any  tie  be- 
cause they  are  to  be  left  that  Universes  can  pass  in  among 
them,  receiving  at  intervals  a  higher  consciousness  for 
spirit. 

The  next  great  condition  was  the  Brotherhood  of  the 
Sun,  through  which  came  a  knowledge  of  the  creation  of 
light,  Creative  Light,  Infinite  Light  and  Vibratory  Light, 
the  unity  of  which  gave  the  highest  form  of  creative  light 
through  which  all  atmic  forces  pass.  All  this  holds  a  per- 
fect form,  without  it  there  could  be  no  such  thing  as  a 
comprehension  within  Immensity. 

As  far  as  I  am  able  to  learn,  all  this  held  no  thought  of 
earth. 

The  third  wonderful  creation  of  spirit,  not  great,  but 
wonderful,  was  the  creation  of  Universes  in  clusters.  The 
reason  they  were  created  in  cluster  was  that  they  might 
hold  next  to  the  Holy  Places  a  condition  subject  to  the 
use  of  spirit.  This  formed  what  was  known  as  the  Outer 
Circle  of  the  Holy  Place.  In  this  placing  within  Immen- 
sity the  recognition  by  spirit  of  expansion  became  a 
Law, — the  first  conscious  thought  outside  of  the  power 
of  creation  to  formulate  a  Law.  In  this  you  will  find  a 
unit  of  thought  that  has  existed  ever  since,  for  without  a 
law  of  expansion  all  spirit  would  have  become  narrow 

109 


and  would  not  have  developed  the  highest  force  within 
itself.  In  seeking  all  this  for  you,  I  find  naught  save  a 
separate  individuality ;  neither  can  I  find  at  any  place  or 
at  any  time  that  it  does  not  remain  so.  In  this  wonderful 
condition  we  found  the  first  thought  of  the  White  Brother- 
hood, giving  through  the  Law,  a  knowledge  of  spiritual 
mentality.  Before  this,  it  was  a  thought  from  the  Infinite 
that  actuated  and  produced  all  that  had  been  undertaken. 
As  you  follow  my  thought  in  this,  you  find  I  have  not 
given  you  any  particular  time.  And  yet  he  who  giveth 
this  unto  me,  saith :  "Thou  shalt  place,  for  man  as  he 
readeth  it,  a  limitation;  without  it  he  would  expand  too 
rapidly  and  not  be  able  to  absorb  this  knowledge."  So  I 
will  place  it  thus. 

The  first  great  creation  within  Immensity,  by  the  In- 
finite in  its  greatness,  according  to  human  thought,  cov- 
ered many  millions  of  ages ;  not  that  the  work  was  slow, 
but  because  Immensity  is  great. 

The  next  creation  by  spirit  before  the  Law,  went  over 
21  millions  of  ages. 

The  third  wherein  the  consciousness  of  spiritual  men- 
tality was  formed,  came  to  18  millions  of  ages. 

The  absorption  of  that  within  spirit  was  the  work  of 
the  purity  of  expression.  That  is  why  the  White  Brother- 
hood has  always  carried,  through  all  the  knowledge  of 
spirit  and  man,  that  same  condition. 

Then  began  the  creations  of  Universes  wherein  spirit 
could  move  and  be  separated  and  held  apart,  as  it  were ; 
as  you  would  say  in  human  ways,  they  were  "schooled" 
or  placed  within  places  of  learning;  that  is  where  Uni- 
verses should  be  remembered  that  they  could  be  under- 
stood ;  for  Universes  hold  all  this. 

You  will  find  in  the  third  separating  the  production 
of  tone,  harmony  and  the  use  of  light  vibrations  was 
called  into  question.  This  is  where  the  Blue,  the  Orange, 


no 


the  Brown,  the  Black  and  the  Grey  Brotherhoods  formed 
a  Circle  of  Creation  at  first;  afterwards  taking  each  one 
a  place  within  Immensity,  giving  the  color  name  to  all 
their  creations.  The  Unknown  Lands,  however,  claimed 
the  most  original  creation  on  account  of  the  color  and 
the  placing  within  them  of  unknown,  undeveloped,  un- 
used mentalities  for  spirit,  leaving  it  for  the  investigation, 
if  I  may  use  such  a  word,  for  they  who  had  utilized  their 
powers  for  other  creations.  You  will  find  in  this  a  well 
formed  plan  out  of  which  the  mentality  of  man  can  en- 
compass the  thought  and  adjust  himself  to  the  placing  of 
all  these  conditions.  Circles,  Cycles,  Worlds,  Planet- 
Consciousness,  separating  into  the  highest  form  of  Infin- 
ite Law,  followed  very  closely  with  all  these  conditions. 
Then  came  the  Units  and  the  creations  of  them  and 
the  folding  within  them  of  what  which  would  exist 
ages  upon  ages  before  they  would  be  made  use  of.  The 
Universe  of  Planetary  Life  was  called  into  a  creation 
when  the  Great  Heavens  became  conscious  of  its  highest 
Law ;  this  was  when  the  thought  of  the  placing  of  mas- 
ters became  a  conscious  thought  for  spirit.  The  Unit  of 
the  higher  condition  of  the  Heavens  to  the  West  was  to 
place  within  them  that  which  has  drifted  through  almost 
like  the  shadow  of  a  thought  to  man,  of  the  hosts,  the 
archangels  of  light  and  the  conscious  purity  of  they  who 
dwell  therein.  Finite  Light  formed  a  portion  of  that  plac- 
ing between  the  Great  Heavens  and  the  High  Heavens. 
Here  was  established  what  afterwards  was  known  as 
Finite  Light  encompassed  within  certain  places  within 
Immensity,  and  here  originated,  for  spirit,  the  first  knowl- 
edge of  space.  I  found  in  my  tracing  many  great  seas  of 
light,  if  I  may  give  it  such  a  name,  holding,  as  it  did, 
wonderful  quantities  that  man  hath  had  no  knowledge  of 
their  existence.  It  was  here  that  spirit  sought  to  utilize 
different  powers  that  lie  within  these  spaces,  for  they 

in 


were  becoming  conscious  of  the  thought  that  Immensity 
was  ready  to  hold  their  productions  and  they  must  see 
that  Immensity  was  filled. 

The  formation  of  three  great  Cycles  was  the  work 
of  the  Holy  Masters,  but  they  were  within  the  Great 
Heavens  when  the  conscious  thought  of  mastership  was 
given  unto  them.  I  wouldst  tell  thee  of  it,  for  thou 
knowest  not  as  yet,  for  thou  wert  not  within  the  Great 
Heavens.  And  he  who  giveth  this  knowledge  unto  me, 
was  called  Omalsion,  because  he  held  the  great  Key  to 
the  knowledge  of  the  Cycles.  Why  do  I  say  this?  That 
you  may  know  that  the  treasures  of  Immensity  are  always 
guarded  and  locked  within  the  temple,  and  they  who 
stand  upon  the  threshold  seeking  wisdom,  must  hold  the 
Key  of  Knowledge  before  he  can  penetrate.  Unto  these 
masters  was  given  this  because  they  were  holy.  Great 
was  the  hour  and  the  day  when  this  was  given  to  them, 
for  from  out  the  Infinite  Source  came  like  the  vestige  of  a 
thin  cloud  floating  as  it  did,  within  the  Great  Heavens, 
seeking  that  it  might  rest  above  the  altar  therein.  He 
who  was  the  Son  of  the  Father  had  called  unto  them  that 
they  might  gather  there  and  unto  them  He  gave  the 
thought  that  spirit  was  to  know  the  meaning  of  this.  So 
the  Holy  Master  stood  within  the  Great  Heavens  and 
consciousness  born  from  the  Infinite,  became  a  portion  for 
them.  And  thou  shalt  create  and  it  shall  be  a  cycle  and  it 
shall  be  a  great  cycle  and  into  it  thou  shalt  place  the 
record  of  my  creations  and  thou  shalt  leave  a  knowledge 
of  it  within  the  Great  Heavens.  Floating  everywhere  as 
if  the  penetration  of  Infinite  was  supreme,  did  it  rest  with 
they  who  were  holy  and  even  I,  Marcus,  standing  as  I  did 
within  the  presence  of  the  Lord  God  Almighty,  recog- 
nized, with  the  experience  I  had  within  many  ages,  that 
this  certainly  was  the  highest  and  the  holiest  that  I  had 
ever  been  conscious  of.  "When  thou  saith  unto  man,"  he 

112 


said  unto  me,  "thou  must  make  it  plain  lest  he  know  not 
the  meaning  of  the  Father.  Say  unto  him,  that  this  cloud 
was  like  the  breath  of  the  Father  that  hath  within  it  a 
knowledge  for  spirit  that  can  cover  many,  many  ages. 
And  it  is  what  is  known  as  the  'Holy  Message  of  the 
Infinite'  that  it  became  a  supreme  law  when  law  is  re- 
quired." Often  I  have  been  within  our  Universe  after  its 
creation,  after  the  great  creative  cycle  gave  me  the  breath 
of  the  Father,  and  I  have  known  the  meaning,  but  I  could 
not  express  even  with  spirit,  the  thought.  Words  telleth 
little  but  we  must  give  that,  small  though  it  may  be,  that 
they  who  traverse  over  many  places  may  seek  in  Im- 
mensity the  realization  of  spirit  consciousness.  In  all 
this  I  found  myself  perfectly  true  to  the  thought  I  had 
been  created  with.  They  who  were  called  afterwards 
from  out  of  the  Heavens  wherein  was  created  a  knowl- 
edge of  numbering,  there  was  they  who  claimed  and  held 
a  place  within  the  High  Heavens  and  was  given  the  name 
of  the  House  of  Israel.  They  within  the  Great  Heavens 
will  always  be  known  as  spirit,  but  will  be  separate  and 
apart,  as  it  were,  as  the  spirit  of  man,  not  earth  man,  but 
spiritual  man,  for  from  out  of  the  Great  Heavens  came 
the  knowledge  of  service  and  worship.  I  say  unto  thee, 
as  thou  hast  said  unto  me,  How  measureth  thou?  I  say 
unto  thee :  "According  as  the  fulfillment  of  the  life  of 
spirit  is,  so  is  the  measurement." 

The  first  condition  of  this  spiritual  man  came  into  the 
Great  Heavens  in  this  manner.  He  who  was  the  Lord 
God  Almighty,  sought  to  use  the  thought  of  the  Father 
which  had  entered  into  his  cycle  of  creation.  It  was  the 
thought  of  spiritual  man,  making  it  into  form  for  Im- 
mensity. I  said  unto  he  who  giveth  me  this  knowledge : 
"Telleth  me  this — how  often  does  the  thought  of  the 
Father  enter  into  the  creative  cycle?"  He  looked  at  me 
and  the  glory  of  his  face  was  like  a  great,  shining  sun, 

113 


and  he  said  unto  me:  "Come  thou  with  me."  I  followed 
him  through  many  a  radiant  pathway  and  when  we  came 
to  the  end  of  our  journey,  I  looked  upon  the  great  thought 
of  our  cycle.  It  separated,  yet  it  was  perfect  in  its  separ- 
ateness.  It  was  Infinite,  yet  it  was  spirit ;  each  individual 
creation  within  it  held  a  thought  for  each  one  individual. 
Then  I  said  :  "Are  they  repeated  ?  Are  they  all  different  ?" 
And  he  said  unto  me:  "Marcus,  they  are  all  different." 
In  this  thou  canst  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  power,  the  force, 
the  immensity  of  Infinite  creation. 

Within  the  Heavens  of  the  West  I  feign  would  have 
a  knowledge  and  he  gave  me  this  thought;  but  first  he 
took  me  where  I  stood  above  the  movements  of  many 
Universes.  Everywhere  was  as  clear  as  if  the  purest 
crystal  was  there ;  light,  color,  movement,  vibration  were 
all  beneath  it,  and  I  looked  upon  those  Heavens.  And 
there  came  to  me  a  thought  into  which  I  placed  my  ques- 
tion and  the  spirit  answered  me  and  said:  "Hath  it  not 
been  given  thee  that  they  who  were  created  for  earth 
must  have  a  greater  knowledge  than  they  who  entereth 
not  into  finite  creation?  Why  are  these  Heavens  the 
boundary  line  of  the  West?  It  shall  be  known  to  thee  as 
thou  followest  out  thy  first  thought  within  thy  cycle,  that 
thou  didst  place  ether  and  give  it  a  form  and  an  aura. 
And  when  thou  didst  that  thou  didst  claim  a  place  within 
that  which  riseth,  moveth  and  setteth,  yet  is  it  wholly 
perfect,  neither  doth  it  become  aught  but  everlasting. 
Look  thou,  he  said,  and  see.  And  I  saw  the  first  great 
cycle  and  that  which  moved  within  it  and  as  thou  know- 
est,  the  Holy  Masters  created  it  and  it  became  a  portion 
of  these  Heavens,  and  it  formed  what  was  known  as  the 
Rim  of  Spirit  Thought. 

I  will  leave  this,  for  thou  knowest  there  are  those  who 
will  say,  I  cannot  understand,  yet  doth  the  spirit  speak 
plain  and  there  is  nothing  that  entereth  into  thought  that 

"4 


cannot  be  fulfilled — spirit  thought  however.  In  all  these 
conditions  many  were  they  who  lived  and  moved  and 
were.  Spiritual  man  in  form  was  etheric,  yet  sought  he 
the  highest  consciousness  of  perfect  form.  Doth  thou  not 
know  that  when  thou  createth  form,  thou  createth  it  with 
a  knowledge  of  spirit,  and  not  with  the  knowledge  of 
man.  Within  all  this  they  moved  and  breathed  and  were 
in  unity  with  one  another ;  each  age  producing,  as  it  were, 
a  closer  relationship  in  all  they  did.  Within  all  this  is  no 
sound ;  even  light  vibrations  produce  none.  This  is  where 
spirit  consciousness  holds  what  is  known  as  harmony. 

I  must  not  make  these  thoughts  tedious  and  so  I 
gather  together  the  many  leaves  of  the  pages  of  the  past 
and  bring  them  for  you  that  they  may  be  filled  full  of 
grand,  great  truths.  The  naming  of  all  these  places,  as 
well  as  the  placing  of  things,  was  the  work  of  many  of 
they  who  had  been  taught  by  those  higher  than  them- 
selves. We  who  were  created  to  form  a  portion  of  uni- 
verses and  afterwards  become  conscious,  as  spirit,  of  all 
that  was  needed  of  us  by  the  Father,  looked  upon  them 
and  came  close  to  them,  knowing  that  whatever  their 
knowledge  was,  could  be  ours — whatever  their  creation 
was  that  formed  a  portion  of  it.  But  strength  must  come 
to  spirit,  more  so  to  they  who  were  created  for  earth, 
than  those  who  were  created  for  other  conditions.  I  say 
unto  thee,  we  question  not  why  thus  and  so  is  placed, 
for  we  need  not  question,  it  cometh  to  us  as  an  answer  as 
we  look  upon  the  great  work  that  is  complete.  Often  in 
my  search  for  thee  I  have  found  they  who  were  equal  in 
all  things,  holding  a  portion  of  circles  that  were  not  fin- 
ished, but  holding  them  ready  to  place  together.  What 
were  these  circles?  Usually  they  held  portions  of  what 
you  will  know  by  this  name — planetary  auras,  world 
auras ;  sometimes  they  were  auras  of  nebulae.  Within 
these  auras  were  many  great  conscious  existences.  They 

"5 


were  not,  however,  to  be  utilized  into  form,  but  were  to 
be  left  as  they  were  for  use  when  needed. 

I  must  tell  thee  how  natural  and  how  easy  all  this  is. 
You  do  not  stand,  as  it  were,  within  a  certain  place  and 
think  that  it  must  be,  but  you  go  hither,  thither  and 
yonder  and  from  this  condition  you  gather  a  conscious- 
ness, from  another  you  gather  another  consciousness; 
and  then  you  seek  to  find  what  you  can  put  in  and  make  a 
material  out  of.  Even  in  spirit  it  is  material. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  Why  did  spirit  created  for  earth  have  to  be  given  a 
greater  knowledge  (strength)  than  other  spirits? 

A.  The  reason,  as  I  have  understood  it,  is  because  it  was 
separated  into  two  conditions,  purity  and  strength.  Only  earth 
spirits  have  been  divided — purity  and  strength. 

Q.     Would  you  kindly  tell  us  why  they  were  separated? 

A.  As  it  was  given  to  me,  there  is  a  certain  polarization 
required  of  spirit 'if  they  come  to  earth,  which  is  not  required  of 
they  who  do  not  come  to  earth. 

Q.  Then  that  is  why  Living  Thought  tells  us  that  he  is  both 
purity  and  strength?  Yes,  not  created  for  earth. 


116 


LESSON  XII 

THE  SIMPLICITY  OF  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— January  29,  1920 

Tonight  Marcus  has  in  his  hand  a  scroll  of  ivory  which 
is  about  four  inches  by  six  inches.  He  unrolls  it,  the  let- 
ters, which  are  peculiarly  shaped,  having  many  curves, 
are  cut  through.  As  Marcus  unrolls  this  scroll  he  holds 
it  up  and  at  the  top  of  it  I  see  these  words : 

"This  doth  hold  the  knowledge  of  Immensity ;  within 
this  place  are  always  the  many  lands  created — the  home 
of  Gods  and  Lords — the  great  abiding  place  of  majesties 
whose  holiness  has  never  held  within  it  aught  save  that 
which  is  of  the  great  Father.  Each  master  hand  doth 
carve  a  letter,  and  the  hands  of  them  who  carve  are  pure, 
so  pure,  that  they  have  ne'er  been  placed  within  a  fleshy 
dwelling  place." 

Read  on. 

"If  within  Immensity  thou  dost  find  aught  save  that 
whose  holiness  ne'er  has  been  described,  I  would  that 
thou  couldst  find  some  word  that  would  express  it,  and 
unfold  for  them  who  listen,  the  great  and  wondrous  units. 
Take  a  thread  of  golden  light  and  as  thou  dost  unroll  the 
ball  see  if  it  can  connect  thee  with  some  far  off  place 
within  Immensity  as  if  some  great  and  wondrous  master 
spoke  to  thee  from  out  where  shining  towers  lift  them- 
selves into  the  blue  of  the  great  dome  of  thought — then 

117 


thou  wouldst  sometime  understand  the  meaning  of  it 
all." 

I,  Marcus,  as  I  read  it  unto  thee,  have  wondered  if  my 
words  oft  express  the  fullest  meaning  that  the  master 
who  carved  it  here  did  speak  and  give  to  us.  Fear  not, 
brave  comrade,  we  have  traveled  far  together  and  the 
voyage  of  our  thought  has  oft  unfurled  its  sails  and, 
going  into  ports  unknown,  have  left  a  message  there. 
So  you  and  I  into  the  greatness  of  Immensity  will  make 
our  way.  Let  us  not  gather  up  what  men  of  science 
would  claim  for  us,  yet,  we  can  find  it  if  they  chose  to  ask 
of  us;  but  in  it  all  let's  you  and  I  find  that  which  ye 
simple  folks  would  love  to  read  about.  So  tonight,  gath- 
ering my  scroll  with  its  carvings,  I  place  it  within  my 
robe  and  ask  of  thee  if  thou  wouldst  go  with  me. 

First,  we  must  find  the  land  wherein  is  the  rest  of 
spirit.  What  rest? — thou  oft  wouldst  ask  me.  It  is  this— 
where  spirit,  finding  that  which  answers  to  it,  leaves  out- 
side all  things  except  that  which,  like  a  garnered  treasure, 
folds  itself  around  and  brings  to  spirit  that  which 
strengthens  it.  Let  no  man  place  a  calculation  on  the  dis- 
tant place  wherein  it  is,  he  may  oft  grow  bewildered ;  yet 
at  times  I  say  to  thee  that  spirit  finds  it  near.  It  may  be 
like  a  call,  clear,  sweet  and  full  of  love ;  it  may  be  like  an 
answering  thought  sent  out  ages  ago  and  never  answered  ; 
it  may  be  that  within  itself  spirit  has  sought  it  and 
claimed  a  place  within  it.  I  say  to  thee,  its  many  wooded 
hills,  its  flower  strewn  valleys,  long  corridors  of  cool, 
clinging  vines,  its  towering  colonnades  form  bright  arches 
over  great  blue  waters  and  huge  grown  cathedrals,  into 
which  we  enter ;  they  have  no  covering,  yet  does  the  light 
always  enter ;  and  as  we  oft  walk  therein  from  out  a  blue 
etheric  atmosphere  there  floats  in  more  than  one  who 
claims  a  place  beside  us.  A  land  of  rest !  How  sweet  it 
seems  to  them  who  enter  it.  Some  bring  messages  to 

118 


others;  some  speak  of  what  earth  holds;  but  more  than 
one  tells  of  the  bright,  bright  journeyings  hither  and  yon 
amidst  Immensity's  great  places.  I  would  oft  speak  with 
thee  of  one  who  keeps  watch  within  it  searching  with 
great,  powerful  lenses,  that  he  might  catch  the  sight  of 
that  which  comes  from  the  Great  Central  Force  making 
its  way  into  Immensity  and,  with  its  pure  intelligence, 
seeking  its  place  according  to  the  law  that  is  given  it. 
'Tis  sometimes  that  thou  dost  find  here  a  master  who  is 
sending  over  the  ether  waves  of  light  a  thought  that 
comes  from  the  Father,  freshly  born,  with  all  the  sweet- 
ness that  the  garnering  of  His  greatness  can  place  within 
it.  Once,  while  there,  I  listened  that  I  might  speak  it  unto 
you,  and  it  was  likened  unto  this :  "Children  of  My  great 
heart,  I  love  thee  with  love  that  grows  evermore.  Place 
always  thy  self  that  thou  mightst  know  and  understand 
Me  better."  I  looked  around,  I  thought,  it  seemed  as  if 
I  caught  a  deeper  meaning,  yet  to  them  who  read  this  'tis 
as  a  father  would  speak  unto  them  he  loves,  never  feeling 
that  he  held  that  grand  and  wondrous  place  within  the 
thought  of  all. 

Come,  comrade,  let  us  go  still  farther  on,  I  would  that 
thou  shouldst  have  a  knowledge  of  all  things  that  others 
might  be  given  it,  also,  the  simple  things  that  abide  in 
this  Immensity.  I  found  it  lying  in  a  cloudless  sea  whose 
holy  color  bathed  it  and  kept  it  ever  green,  fresh  and 
verdant.  He  who  went  with  me  laughed  softly  as  he  led 
me  thither.  "Marcus,"  he  said,  "'tis  truly  told  of  thee  that 
thou  hast  been  to  earth — what  findest  thou  within  the 
planet  dark?  Have  they  no  garnered  seeds  or  plants 
newer  than  when  first  the  earth  was  made?"  Laughing 
softly  he  took  me  where  an  island  blossomed  like  the 
roses  fair  and  everything  was  there,  not  e'en  the  vales  of 
Kashmir  have  ever  had  within  them  roses  like  these.  So 
I  would  speak  to  thee  and  tell  thee  that  in  all  my  wander- 

119 


ings  within  this  planet  in  Immensity  I  found  the  richest 
of  all  God's  plants  that  He  had  given  to  earth.  Long  ago 
I  brought  thee  two  of  them  that  thou  mightst  have  a 
thought  of  what  was  given  unto  me  and  shown  me.  One 
was  a  closely  folded  bud,  crimson  and  rich  e'en  to  its 
heart.  The  other  was  pure  white.  As  I  looked  upon  them 
I  felt  a  breath  of  sweetness  fall,  yet  thou  hast  never 
known  or  reasoned  to  thyself  as  to  why  thou  dost  love 
them  both  equally  the  same.  I  asked  of  him  who  kept 
them,  "What  hast  thou  to  do  with  this  and  why  within 
Immensity  is  placed  this  plant  holding,  as  it  does,  all  that 
is  needful,  even  more  than  earth  has?"  "This,"  he  said, 
"is  where  the  seeds  are  given  life,  and  if  thou  goest  unto 
all  the  planets  thou  shalt  find  a  specie  like  unto  this  save 
that  once  in  a  while  their  light  brings  a  stronger  and  a 
higher  reproduction  of  it  all.  Even  if  thou  goest  to  the 
Spheres  thou'lt  find  them  there,  and  to  the  many  Worlds 
equally  are  placed  the  products  of  our  planet."  Then  I 
asked  him  if  he  would  give  me  a  name.  He  stopped  a 
moment  and  then  said:  "Yea  verily,  it  is  called,  by  men 
and  masters,  the  Planet  Ryx.  But  I  say  to  thee,  I  know  it 
has  God's  most  beauteous  flowers,  that  blossom  ever, 
never  fading,  for  we  give  it  life  that  lives."  Then  ques- 
tioned I  and  said  to  him :  "What  was  it,  then,  that  gave 
to  earth  a  semblance  of  it  all,  and  yet  it  faded  and  it  went 
back  within  the  sort?"  He  looked  upon  me  and  said: 
"Marcus,  thou  art  a  master,  hast  thou  never  seen  a  dark- 
ness fall  upon  a  plant  and  shut  away  the  life  there  is 
within  it?  So  does  the  earth;  it  swings  around  and  half 
the  time  too  dark  it  is  for  plants  or  grains  to  live." 
"Yea,"  I  said  to  him,  "but  there  are  the  trees,  they  hold 
their  place  and  some  never  lose  their  leaves."  Then  he 
spake  and  said :  "Marcus,  where  do  they  grow?"  I  thought 
me  of  the  mountain  heights  and  the  cool,  dark  green 
palms,  and  answered  him.  He  laughed  and  said :  "Know- 


120 


est  thou  not  that  they  are  bred  within  the  atoms  of  the 
earth,  and  dost  thou  not  know  that  they  were  atoms  left  as 
residue  and  had  to  seek  a  consciousness?  Dost  thou  not 
know  they  claim  the  bright  intelligence  of  that  which 
we  have  given  to  earth,  and  yet  we  gave  them  not  the 
fullness  of  life?" 

I  went  my  way  spanning  the  spaces  of  Immensity,  and 
floating  o'er  it  like  a  thought,  I  found  myself  standing 
upon  a  clear,  yet  narrow  line  that  seemed  as  if  it  did 
protect  and  hold.  I  saw  no  passing  spirit,  yet,  as  I 
waited,  many  came  to  me  as  if  some  thought  of  mine  had 
brought  them.  Some  looked  strange  to  me  even  as  spirit 
vision  viewed  them;  they  wore  strange  clothing;  yet  as  I 
questioned  them  I  saw  my  vision  clear  and  then  I  knew 
I  stood  within  what  oft  is  known  as  the  great  Land  of 
the  Philistines.  Warriors  they  must  have  been,  as  size 
and  strength  did  show.  Their  land  had  many  things, 
large  in  form,  majestic  in  all  ways.  Yet  I  say  to  thee, 
my  comrade,  that  they  lacked  the  soul  of  all  things. 

Deep  within  their  dwelling  place  which  they  called  the 
Isle  of  Pearls,  they  had  a  great,  crude  chapel  hewn  from 
great  rocks,  and  held  together  with  beams  of  teakwood. 
Some  of  them  were  over  two  hundred  feet  in  length ;  some 
were  round  and  some  were  square.  The  round  ones  must 
have  measured  twenty  feet  in  circumference ;  while  the 
square  ones,  cut  and  chiseled  smooth,  and  polished,  were, 
in  the  beginning,  at  least  thirty  feet  in  circumference. 
Within  this  chapel  crude  I  found  a  beautiful  and  wondrous 
monument.  He  who  showed  me  all  this  spoke  very  calmly 
and  clearly,  as  if  in  all  he  said  unto  me  he  asked  a  question. 
He  told  me  thus :  In  the  annals  of  our  history  we  find, 
that  once  upon  a  time  ages  and  ages  ago  our  people  dwelt 
within  the  earth  and  held  their  place  that  they  might  use 
immensity  of  form,  and  then  we  came  unto  our  own.  It 
had  been  set  apart  for  us  and  held  that  we  might  have  a 

121 


dwelling  place.  Once,  since  we  have  lived  here,  there 
came  to  us  a  master  of  the  Seventh  Universe;  he  was  a 
skilled  and  crafty  workman.  He  told  us  that  he  came  to 
place  for  us  a  promise,  and  the  promise  was  in  the  form 
that  dost  see  here  within  our  chapel.  It  was  a  figure 
carved  from  a  piece  of  pure  white  teakwood,  such  as 
grows  not  upon  the  earth  at  any  time.  It  took  him  many 
years,  of  earth's  counting,  to  carve  it,  but  it  was  most  per- 
fect. The  hands  outstretched  seemed  offering  up  a 
prayer.  He  bowed  his  head  and  when  again  he  spoke  to 
me  he  said :  "It  is  a  promise  that,  when  the  time  shall  be 
for  us,  unto  us,  through  prayer,  shall  a  soul  oft  be  given." 
I  looked  upon  it  and  saw  the  features  glow  and  burn  with 
deep  intensity,  as  if  some  life  force  flowed  within  it. 

Strange  things  are  within  Immensity,  my  friends,  and 
this  is  one  of  them. 

Once  when  I  had  wandered  far  in  my  journeys  to  the 
earth,  again  I  saw  the  figure  and  the  face,  but  this  time 
there  was  spirit  in  it ;  not  a  figure  asking  for  a  soul.  They 
gave  to  me  from  off  their  shore  many  a  handful  of  the 
gleaming  pearls,  not  only  of  one  size,  but  of  many,  like 
pebbles  upon  a  beach ;  yet  they  were  smooth  and  round, 
and  shone  and  glittered  in  the  light.  He  bade  me  come 
again.  Many  were  the  questions  he  asked  of  me — Had 
I  known,  had  I  ever  heard  of  Him  who  was  to  bless  them? 
Had  I  ever  known  how  many  there  were  of  their  people? 
He  clung  to  me  and  oft  was  loath  to  let  me  go.  Yet  when 
I  went  I  saw  as  if  some  bright,  white  plummed  bird  had 
lifted  its  wings  above  this  land  sheltering  and  keeping  it, 
and  I  knew  that  peace  did  dwell  there,  peace  that  knoweth 
all  things  yet  is  willing  to  wait  all  waiting  the  decision  of 
their  God. 

Why  are  the  busy  dwellers  within  Immensity  given 
that  which  would  lead  them  higher  and  still  higher? 

122 


I  have  told  thee  of  the  many  things  they  do,  yet  never 
have  I  found  a  place  wherein  it  ended. 

This  brings  me  to  tell  thee  of  the  scroll  I  have  brought 
this  night  that  thou  mightst  know  from  whence  it  came 
and  why  it  is  made  as  it  is. 

Within  the  Land  of  Vision  I  found,  laid  away  amidst 
the  many  things  that  always  hold  for  spirit,  a  greater 
revelation.  I  asked  of  them  who  gathered  there  if  unto 
me  was  given  the  right  to  bring  it  unto  earth  that  there 
should  be  a  sight,  a  description  and  an  interpretation  of 
it;  that  there  would  be  those  who,  knowing  of  it,  should 
understand.  "Yea  verily,"  they  answered  me,  "but  thou 
must  keep  it,  it  must  be  returned,  there  will  be  other 
masters  who  will  claim  the  privilege  thou  hast  asked/' 
Looking  upon  it  I  found  this  number  cut  upon  its  ivory 
page — 1560000  B.  C.  The  figures  in  this  numbering  were 
not  made  as  at  the  present,  neither  were  they  made  like 
the  Romans  calculated.  The  number  was  cut  in  the  form 
of  a  square  and  the  figures  were  placed  in  the  center  of 
each  square,  the  first  square  having  within  it  the  figure  1, 
and  encircling  it  were  as  many  ciphers  as  would  make 
the  one  million,  according  to  earth's  calculation  at  the 
present;  the  other  figures  followed  in  like  manner.  I 
asked  who  made  it  and  they  gave  me  the  name  of  Sattous. 
He  was  a  dweller  within  the  planet  Saturn.  The  ivory 
upon  which  these  figures  were  placed  was  made  by  him 
from  the  ether  of  the  color  of  the  planet,  condensing  it  by 
the  power  of  radio-color,  which  is  a  color  that  creates 
color — as  seeds  reproduce  seeds.  It  is  the  only  one  that 
has  been  created.  The  method  of  his  placing  these  figures 
upon  it  was  by  holding  the  ivory  within  a  rotary  move- 
ment of  color  and  whenever  it  had  reached  a  certain  de- 
gree of  light,  each  figure  that  formed  the  number  was 
placed  within  the  ivory.  The  figures  were  not  of  his  crea- 
tion, but  he  knew  they  were  placed  by  the  movement  of 

123 


the  creative  cycles  which  produced  light.  They  had  held 
this  message  for  many,  many  ages,  that  is  why  it  was  not 
reproduced  since.  It  is  positively  indestructible.  When  it 
is  found  needful  to  produce  this  fabric,  or  ivory,  as  I  have 
called  it  that  you  may  understand  me,  it  will  be  by  those 
who  will  make  it  a  study  under  his  direction.  They  do 
not  call  it  ivory,  they  call  it  insote,  which  means,  within 
color  light.  The  figures  I  have  given  you  are  simplified 
into  English,  for  his  figures  were  greater  in  strength,  in 
form  and  in  meaning  for  spirit  than  could  possibly  be 
given  to  a  human  mind. 

I  asked  why  it  was  placed  within  the  Land  of  Vision 
and  they  answered  me  thus :  It  is  because  it  was  the  first 
work  of  a  master  within  a  planet  and  he  was  given  this 
vision  of  color  and  the  creation  by  the  power  of  color 
through  light.  He  worked  until  he  reproduced  it  that  it 
might  form  a  place  in  the  Land  of  Vision  within  Im- 
mensity. 

I  want  to  go  with  you  just  a  little  farther  tonight. 
I  have  often  spoken  to  you  about  consciousness  and  the 
power  that  spirit  holds  with  regard  to  that  great  con- 
sciousness. 

I  wandered  far  and  many  were  the  thoughts  I  gath- 
ered that  I  might  place  them  all  for  you  and  others  who 
ask  for  it.  I  wandered  over  a  shining  roadway,  traveling 
easily,  and  there  came  to  me  one  who  spoke  to  me  in 
words,  I  knew  not  of  at  first,  but  after  a  moment  the 
thoughts  he  expressed  seemed  flooding  my  very  soul. 
I  listened — all  around  and  about  us  seemed  to  be  moving 
places  as  if  some  thought  he  gave  me  or  some  thought  I 
had,  had  there  produced  them.  I  turned  and  looked  at 
him.  He  was  great  of  stature,  yet  unto  me  he  looked  not 
unlike  a  Roman.  "Marcus,"  he  said,  "Rome  is  the  same 
today  as  it  was  yesterday.  What  seekest  thou?"  Then  I 
knew  he  oft  had  understood  my  thought.  Long  we  talked 

124 


together,  spirit  unto  spirit.  I  would  give  thee  something 
of  our  knowledge.  He  said  to  me,  "Marcus,  the  greatness 
of  Rome  was  not  built  in  a  century.  Dost  thou  know  the 
full  meaning  of  thy  consciousness  of  Rome? — why  thou 
didst  seek  a  physical  at  Rome?"  I  could  not  answer  him ; 
it  seemed  while  yet  I  spoke  to  him  that  thousands  upon 
thousands  of  thoughts  of  Earth,  of  Planets,  of  Worlds, 
Immensity,  Zones,  Suns,  all  things,  flooded  my  soul. 
Again  I  felt  the  greatness  of  his  presence.  "Marcus,"  he 
said,  "hast  thou  not  learned  the  great  creation  of  the  con- 
sciousness of  spirit?"  It  is  that  something  set  apart,  held, 
yet  perfectly.  Hast  thou  not  found  the  great  head-waters 
of  that  knowledge?"  Then  I  looked  upon  the  majesty 
within  Immensity.  I  say  to  thee  it  had  a  form  and  yet 
that  form  seemed  interwoven  throughout  all  that  which 
thou  dost  call  Immensity.  I  knew,  I  understood ;  and  in 
that  knowing,  and  in  that  understanding,  every  realization 
of  my  spirit  was  born  to  me  when  first  I  took  the  great 
oath  flame  with  my  Creator  until  just  ere  I  came  to  thee 
tonight.  It  flooded  and  swept  away  everything.  I  seemed 
to  stand  within  Immensity  alone  save  for  him  who  stood 
with  me.  So,  simple  as  this  may  seem  to  thee,  it  gives 
unto  them  who  know  not,  a  fuller  meaning. 

O  great  Immensity,  thou  dost  hold  in  thy  hand  an- 
swered problems;  thou  givest  freely;  thou  art  crowned 
with  a  crown  that  fades  not — not  ever — and  within  thy- 
self every  breath  holds  the  answer  to  the  great  questions 
that  are  asked  by  spirit. 


125 


LESSON  XIII 

THE  ZONIC  CREATION  OF  IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— December  4,  1919 

After  some  difficulty,  I  find  that  we  have  at  last  suc- 
ceeded in  arranging  my  words  so  they  will  be  satisfac- 
torily understood  by  all.  However,  the  spirit  of  the  word 
into  which  I  strove  to  place  the  strongest  impressions  is 
what  will  eventually  be  the  great  work  of  what  is  written. 

Tonight  we  want  to  take  up  a  still  further  knowledge 
of  Immensity,  and  yet  I  find  as  I  come  in  touch  with  the 
words  I  have  given  you,  that  I  must  hold  it  a  little  plainer 
in  expression  as  there  may  be  those  who  will  wish  to  read 
it,  yet  not  feeling  as  if  they  could  quite  understand. 

Immensity  is  what  holds  the  substance  of  all  created 
things,  yet  Immensity  is  capable  of  a  farther  expansion 
into  which  still  greater  things  can  be  placed. 

In  our  last  journey  into  Immensity  we  traveled  with 
light  hearts  and  joyous  throbs  within  our  spirit,  as  I 
placed  it  in  this  thought,  that  you  may  follow  me  and 
they  who  are  reading  my  words.  Consciously  we  drew 
together  all  the  fragments  that  form  for  us,  in  spirit,  the 
great  pleasures  that  fold  around  us  and  carry  us  through 
fragrant  air  into,  perhaps,  many  places. 

I  also  found,  in  forcing  my  way,  as  it  were,  into  the 
depths  of  Immensity,  many  arches*  that  at  first  seemed 


*"Some   of   these   arches   hold   upon   themselves   wonderful 
inscriptions,  such  as  this:  'Like  a  thought  we  welcome  you  that 

126 


close  to  me,  but,  on  peering  still  closer,  I  saw  those  en- 
trances light,  as  it  were,  giving  me  a  way  to  follow 
through.  Some  of  these  arches  hold  upon  themselves 
wonderful  inscriptions,  such  as  this :  "Like  a  thought  we 
welcome  you  that  the  winged  Gods  may  give  thee  still 
greater  ones."  Others  hold  this :  "Immensity  is  bridged 
with  many  a  consciousness  for  spirit,  yet  he  who  comes 
within  always  hath  the  right  to  unlock  and  read  what- 
ever is  for  him."  Others  hold  still  more  of  the  wonder- 
ful inscriptions:  "Welcome  unto  thee  who  e'er  thou  art. 
If  thou  wouldst  learn  of  Gods,  then  study  well  what  is 
within  the  archives ;  but  if  thou  wouldst  know  most  fully 
the  wisdom  of  the  Infinite,  full  many  an  Age  wouldst  thou 
oft  spend  with  us  ere  thou  hadst  learned  e'en  what  we 
hold  within."  So  you  see,  even  there,  we  find  an  answer 
to  many  questions.  The  reality  of  all  this  is  what  will 
impress  you  as  a  thinker,  as  well  as  the  strong  influence 
of  thought  that  is  given  unto  us  as  spirit. 


the  winged  Gods  may  give  thee  still  greater  ones'."  Will  you 
explain  something  about  the  winged  Gods?  In  that  inscription 
the  winged  Gods  would  mean,  they  who  come  unto  you  as  the 
movement.  I  understand  the  meaning  of  "winged"  in  a  higher 
creation  is  that  which  moves  as  life  forces  move.  There  are 
places  where  they  speak  of  the  winged  Gods  as  the  movement  of 
time?  That,  of  course,  is  a  different  condition.  But  I  have  given 
to  you  what  belongs  to  the  inscription. 

Q.     Are  they  the  Gods  who  created  the  winged  light? 

A.  No,  when  you  come  close  enough  to  any  great  spiritual 
power  or  force  the  sound  is  like  the  movement  of  wings,  strong 
wings. 

I  want  you,  however,  in  placing  these  things,  to  place  them 
only  where  they  belong  in  Immensity,  for  there  are  other  connec- 
tions and  conditions,  if  they  were  used  in  those  conditions,  would 
change  the  meaning  of  the  thought  entirely.  The  explanations 
that  are  there  belong  there.  If  they  were  called  "winged  Gods" 
somewhere  else  there  would  be  a  different  interpretation. 

127 


Passing  through  these  wonderful  archways  we  oft- 
times  are  confronted  by  tremendous  cities,  seeming  to  us, 
as  spirit,  so  full  of  the  life  and  the  influence  and  the  won- 
derful busy  conditions  that  such  a  city  would  hold.  Every- 
where throughout  it  all  is  the  harmony  and  the  joyous- 
ness  and  the  fullness  of  life  as  spirit  lives  it.  If  you 
would  confer  with  sages,  then  they  are  here  to  be  with 
you  as  long  as  you  would  desire.  If,  in  the  lightness  and 
the  joyousness  of  love,  thou  wouldst  seek  those  who  hold 
it,  thou  art  always  welcome  in  their  midst.  Thou  never 
seemeth  like  a  stranger,  yet  in  it  all  the  grandeur  and  the 
fullness  of  their  knowledge  holds  a  place  even  though 
seemingly  it  is  a  lightness  and  a  joyousness  complete 
within  itself,  yet  always  thou  canst  trace  out  that  which 
is  within  it,  holding  it  as  a  supreme  and  wondrous  knowl- 
edge, placed  there  by  Him  who  created  it. 

Within  these  wonderful  cities  you  will  often  find  great 
places  where  ideals  of  spirit  are  enacted;  this  is  beyond 
the  ideal  of  man's  brain,  in  its  immensity  and  fineness ;  it 
is  almost  beyond  description,  and  only  once  in  a  while 
doth  earth  produce  a  master  strong  enough  that  physical 
life  may  carry  forth  a  reflection  of  what  is  here  repro- 
duced. 

Knowledge  in  every  form  is  procured  through  the 
influence  of  vibratory  motion  within  the  air.  You  will  oft- 
times  find  yourself  questioning,  with  thought,  something 
that  you  see,  or  perhaps  hear,  and  almost  instantly  your 
attention  if  directed  to  some  motion  around  you  like  a 
breath,  into  which  turning,  you  can  see  the  answer  to 
your  thought.  This  gives  you  a  remarkable  experience 
and  it  ofttimes  leads  you  farther  than  you  would  expect. 
For  an  example:  upon  entering  and  questioning  in  this 
way,  my  thought  turned  to  you  as  physical  being,  and 
within  myself  I  thought — can  it  be  that  I  can  remember 
and  carry  back  this  experience?  A  breath,  a  movement, 

128 


perfectly  conscious  and,  turning,  I  felt  as  if  upon  the 
atmosphere  were  written  these  words:  "Certainly,  there 
is  no  reason  why  the  powers  of  spirit  should  not  carry  all 
and  any  message  or  knowledge  to  those  who  are  ready  to 
receive  it."  In  this  I  cannot  say  to  you  that  there  was  any 
form  or  figure  or  written  word. 

I  still  questioned,  as  I  understood  from  the  thought 
you  gave  me,  that  the  earth  was  waiting  to  know  the 
manner  by  which,  spirit,  in  its  penetration  of  Immensity, 
held  still  a  thought  for  the  earth.  My  thought  floating 
out  seemed  to  catch  within  itself  a  tenderness  and  a  love 
and  a  comradeship,  and  I  questioned  like  unto  this :  Shall 
the  earth  in  the  fullness  and  the  glory  of  its  new  place, 
still  find  within  Immensity  the  greatness  of  the  Father? 
And  then  as  if  the  glory  of  it  all  filled  my  thought  for  a 
moment,  I  heard,  as  if  the  softness  of  the  words  was 
tenderly  sweet:  "Yea  verily,  they  who  are  My  children 
hath  all  that  Immensity  holds."  The  power  of  spirit 
questioning,  as  it  does,  hath  no  need  to  know  aught  save 
the  beauty  of  the  Father's  love. 

Passing  on  beyond  this  wonderful  city  into  which  I 
know  was  placed  more  than  the  brain  of  man  can  encom- 
pass, I  found  a  wonderful  zonic  movement.  At  first  it 
looked  to  me,  in  comparison,  like  many  of  the  wonderful 
belts  that  are  placed  to  drive  immense  machinery.  These 
Zones  were  of  different  colors  and  of  different  breadths ; 
and  seemingly  held  stronger  forces  than  others.  They 
did  not  all  move  in  circular  movement,  but  some  moved 
elongated,  some  seemed  to  be  almost  quiet,  as  their 
motion  was  so  rapid. 

I  looked  as  if  I  would  ask  the  meaning,  and  as  I  did  so 
one  who  had  been  with  me  in  the  city  whose  face  was  a 
wonderful  study  in  its  intellectual  and  spiritual  repose, 
answered  me  very  quietly :  "This  is  where  the  creation  of 
all  forces  is." 

129 


Again  the  thought  came :  "What  need  hath  they  to  be 
created  in  this  manner?"  "Yea,"  he  said,  "thou  must 
gather  thy  knowledge  for  him  who  is  upon  the  earth,  and 
I  say  unto  thee,  it  is  created  here."  "Look  closely,"  he 
said,  "see  where  that  largest  Zone  moves  so  rapidly  that 
you  can  scarcely  see  that  it  is  moving?  And  look  and  see 
if  you  can  see  the  many  colors  that  are  within  it."  I 
stepped  closer,  it  seemed  as  if  I  must  understand  and, 
looking,  I  noticed  that  its  depth  was  almost  immeasur- 
able; I  had  not  recognized  this  before;  and  I  seemed  to 
be  looking  into  a  wonderful,  immeasurable  condition. 
And  as  I  watched  I  saw  first  only  very  small  specks  or 
fractions  of  light ;  they  were  moving  perfectly  in  groups, 
each  group  colored  according  to  its  nearness  to  the  sur- 
face of  this  Zone.  I  looked  at  him  who  was  with  me  and 
I  am  sure  he  understood  my  thought,  for  immediately  he 
answered  me:  "Yes,  here  is  where  the  first  lexcons*  are 
created  and  it  is  not  until  they  reach  the  surface  and, 
passing  out  into  Immensity,  do  they  become  atoms." 
Looking,  he  called  my  attention  to  a  very  small  rod,  not 
over  twelve  inches  in  length,  and  certainly  not  larger 
around  than  an  ordinary  straw ;  it  seemed  to  be  made 
of  something  very  clear.  And  then  he  told  me  it  was  a 
portion  of  what  is  known  as  the  "original  creative  light." 
It  is  never  interrupted  or  touched  by  any  one.  It  was 
here  long  before  I  became  spirit  or  had  a  consciousness 
of  this  condition ;  and  one  of  the  wise  sages  told  me  it 
measured  every  atom  created  within  this  Zone. 

I  still  further  questioned  that  you  might  know,  and 
I  am  placing  this  for  you  that  it  may  be  understood  by 
others. 


*What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  lexcons? 

It  means  the  particles  that  are  smaller  than  atoms. 

130 


The  measurement  of  the  Zone  in  its  depth  exceeds  any 
legitimate  number  that  man  has  ever  created.  So  if,  in 
his  multiplicity  of  numbers,  he  should  treble  it  many 
times,  he  could  not  form  an  estimate  of  its  depth.  The 
width  of  it,  as  near  as  I  can  give  you,  would  be  five 
times  the  surface  of  the  earth  if  the  earth  were  spread  out 
full  width.  The  circumference  of  it,  he  told  me,  meas- 
ured one-eighth  of  the  distance  of  Immensity  from  rim  to 
rim.  Again  my  thought  came  to  him :  "Why  do  you  say 
'from  rim  to  rim'?"  "Because,  with  us,  the  rim  means, 
the  power  of  the  consciousness  of  spirit  to  place,  momen- 
tarily, a  limit  of  projection."  This  will  answer  one  of  the 
grave  questions  that  will  come  to  man  in  the  future.* 

Passing  on  to  the  other  Zones  I  found  them  holding 
what  would  be  known  as  the  "magnitudes  of  light,"  by 
which  spirit  is  supplied  with  what  we  will  place  in  these 
words,  as  the  "life  essence."  And  I  would  that  all  should 
remember  that  even  in  Immensity  spirit  can  derive  from 
these  conditions  that  which  gives  it  strength  and  power. 
For  an  example :  In  spirit's  transition  from  place  to  place, 
like  thought,  we  require  that  light,  which  gives  us  the 
formation  of  force  by  which  we  can  traverse  in  this  man- 
ner, making  my  answer  to  the  thought  of  those  who  will 
question,  as  plain  as  I  possibly  can.  You  ofttimes,  as 
spirit,  find  yourself  seeking  to  traverse  into  a  certain  Uni- 
verse which  may  be  situated  at  what  would  be  known, 


*May  I  know  what  this  question  is? 

The  question  is  there — the  consciousness  shows  momentarily 
to  spirit  how  to  limit.  There  is  the  answer  to  it — shows  him  how 
to  do  it.  For  one  moment  he  is  conscious  of  being  able  to  limit 
that. 

Marcus,  you  say,  this  will  answer  one  of  the  grave  questions 
that  will  come  to  man  in  the  future.  Will  you  explain? 

Certainly,  when  he  is  purely  spirit — no  way  of  measuring  it 
as  yet,  any  more  than  you  will  the  measurement  of  that  instru- 
ment. 

131 


even  to  spirit,  as  a  great  space  in  Immensity.  We  usually, 
under  these  conditions,  feel  as  if  we  would  demand  for 
ourselves  some  of  this  wonderful  light.  You  will  find  it, 
perhaps,  as  you  would  find  a  portion  within  the  air  as  you 
turn  and  travel  in  the  freshness  of  the  morning.  Some- 
times the  Illumined  Worlds  place,  by  the  aid  of  their  mas- 
ters in  the  near  conditions  of  the  earth,  what  are  known  as 
"stations"  where  this  light  is  placed  for  those  who  re- 
quire it,  as  many  times  masters  who  come  to  earth  reduce 
this  light  in  a  great  degree  as  the  darkness  of  the  earth 
naturally  absorbs  light. 

Passing  on  into  the  other  Zones,  I  saw  the  first  great 
formations  of  nebulae.  These  are  within  the  Zones  which 
are  oblong,  and  they  are  filled  full,  seemingly  to  me  in 
expressing  the  thought,  as  if  great  sunlights  had  been 
placed  within  them.  They  move,  however,  not  so  rapidly, 
and,  passing  off  from  them  like  vapor,  you  can  see  what  is 
like  a  cloud-like  formation.  It  clusters  together  for  a 
moment  gathering  itself,  and  moves  into  whichever  por- 
tion of  Immensity  is  placed  for  them  to  use.  I  say  "they" 
because  each  portion  seems  to  be  fully  intellectual  in  its 
movement  and  in  its  form.  It  is  always  cloud-like,  how- 
ever. And  I  followed  them  that  there  should  be  a  proper 
explanation.  You  will  see,  as  creations  are  depending 
upon  them  for  protection,  that  within  them  flash  forth,  at 
intervals,  strong  lights. 

Immensity  sometimes  expands  for  them  that  they  may 
have  a  proper  place  for  great  creations,  such  as  immense 
worlds  that  are  always  etheric  in  form,  are  placed  within 
Immensity. 

You  will  sometimes  find,  within  these,  small  particles 
moving  like  points  of  light,  then  instantly  they  are 
whirled  of  their  own  accord  into  Immensity  and  formu- 
late around  themselves  great  bodies  of  light  which  can  be 
utilized  by  spirit  for  whatever  spirit  may  need  it  for. 

132 


In  all  these  great  answers  to  thoughts  I  say  unto  thee 
the  traversing  of  Immensity  holds  so  much. 

Once  in  a  while  you  will  find  within  Immensity  a  won- 
derful island  peopled  by  those  who  are  masters  and  into 
their  company  you  pass.  They  have  forms  that  are  not 
either  uncouth  or  undeveloped,  but  usually  very  perfect, 
holding  no  monstrous  developments  anywhere.  You 
could  stand  many,  many  moments  with  them,  for  within 
every  one  of  those  places  which  I  visited  I  found  new 
thoughts  of  interest.  And  it  was  while  I  was  passing 
through  Immensity  that  I  came  upon  what  is  the  great 
planet  that  the  earth  has  never  held  within  its  orbit. 
This  planet  was  fully  occupied  by  wonderful  spiritualized 
forms.  Here  they  create  some  of  the  most  beautiful  ex- 
pressions of  thought  that  I  have  ever  known.  Another 
planet  I  found  where  they  develop  the  highest  form  of  life 
as  far  as  plants  are  concerned.  Another  is  where  the 
germinating  of  life  in  grains  or  seeds  is  created  and  the 
propagation  of  life  in  its  forces  is  everlasting. 

I  found  also  in  Immensity  many  clusters  that  at  first 
were  formed  like  worlds,  but  upon  entering  them  I  found 
that  they  were  closely  connected  with  great  colonnades 
and  arches  whereby  spirit  passes  from  one  to  the  other. 
They  are  set  at  what  you  would  say  was  a  perfect  meas- 
urement one  from  the  other.  These  I  found  were  called 
under  the  names  of  those  who  were  the  first  great  purity 
of  light  and  they  were  called  Leibons*  because  of  the  for- 
mation of  the  arches  that  connected  them.  Here  it  is 


*Meaning  of  Leibons? 

That  is  the  name  given  to  whatever  I  have  given  you,  just 
the  same  as  you  would  say  something  was  steel,  pig  iron  or 
something  else.  That  is  the  name  of  it. 

Marcus  says:  Immensity,  thou  art  so  full,  thy  measure  'tis 
overflowing;  yet  as  we  search  amidst  it  all,  we  find  that  greater 
doth  it  grow.  It  seems  as  if  the  majesty  of  Immensity  e'en 

133 


that  many  of  the  outer  crusts  of  the  Illumined  Worlds 
are  held  until  they  are  needed.  If  you  would  ask  me  how 
they  are  placed  together  the  only  manner  in  which  I 
could  explain  it  would  be  as  if  you  took  a  large  ball  of 
thread,  with  the  exception  that  these  threads  are  beauti- 
fully illumined,  and  unrolling,  they  begin  to  form,  as  it 
were,  a  motion  of  their  own.  If  tossed  out  into  the  ether 
of  the  air  around  these  conditions,  you  will  instantly  see 
them  formulating  into  what  would  be  an  etheric  covering 
or  crust.  They  not  only  expand  in  length  but  also  in 
width. 

In  coming  to  the  earth  and  passing  through  these 
many  experiences  I  have  found  myself  striving  to  answer 
a  grave  question — If  the  earth's  crust  protects  it,  is  it  sub- 
ject to  the  change  of  gravity  as  it  passes  into  the  condi- 
tion of  Immensity  that  holds  these  crusts?  I  found,  upon 
searching,  one  who  could  fully  answer  me.  Lights'  at- 
traction is  always  a  movement;  the  adherence  of  etheric 
crusts  does  not  depend  upon  movement,  but  upon  the 
adherent  need  that  must  be  given  out  by  the  force  by 
which  the  earth  will  traverse  when  it  enters  into  a  condi- 
tion necessary  to  form  a  place  within  Immensity. 

Unifying  our  thought,  one  with  the  other,  we  find  our- 
selves readily  adjusting  all  things  that  we  can  make  a 
comparison  by  which  all  may  be  able  to  understand. 

Immensity  seems,  to  those  who  have  not  been  within 
it,  like  a  large  vacuum  which  is  filled  full  of  many  things, 
but  I  would  like  to  impress  upon  you  the  thought  that  it 
is  not  in  that  form,  but  is  more  like  a  wonderful  journey- 
ing place  where  you  may  wander  past  many  wonderful 
creations,  yet  feel  as  if  they  were  familiar  to  you  and  that 
you  were  not  a  stranger  within  them. 


though  we  strive  to  oft  reduce,  bringing  it  into  the  consciousness 
of  spirit,  yet  how  oft  dost  thou  think  that  we  must  still  reduce  it 
that  the  mind  of  man  can  grasp.  Thou,  O  thou,  Immensity! 

134 


Let  your  mind  traverse  easily  and  perfectly  with  us; 
do  not  feel  as  if  you  did  not  know  how  to  encompass  the 
thought,  but  make  it  as  easy  for  yourself  as  if  you  were 
studying  in  your  own  home  and  across  distances  over 
which  you  have  traversed  yourself,  you  send  a  loving 
thought  that  it  may  find  a  resting  place  with  those  who 
are  far  away  from  you.  So  it  is  with  spirit,  as  we  traverse 
in  Immensity,  gathering  up  from  out  of  it  the  many 
things  that  apparently  may  seem  wonderful  to  those  who 
are  not  used  to  hearing  from  us,  and  we  are  adapting 
ourselves  to  them  and  to  the  ones  to  whom  we  come  so 
often,  that  those  who  are  striving  to  understand  us,  per- 
haps a  little  more  closely,  will  make  a  place  for  others 
that  they  may  become  more  conscious  of  what  I  have  to 
give  them. 

In  this,  giving  it  as  I  do,  it  will  make  it  a  pleasure  for 
those  who  try  to  read  it,  and  we  all  know  in  the  land 
of  the  spirit,  for  such  I  will  call  it,  that  we  must  always 
be  gentle  and  careful  with  those  who  are  anxious  to 
learn  yet  know  not  how  they  shall  begin.  I  often  think 
of  the  days  of  the  Romans,  among  them  were  many  who 
were  wise,  sages  they  were,  yet  their  thoughts  were  oft- 
times  expressed  in  a  simple  manner,  such  as  this,  "Pasyur 
quatas  man,"  translated,  this  means :  "Man,  through  sim- 
plicity, gives  the  thought  of  a  greater  and  a  grander  life." 
You  see  I  have  not  forgotten  the  old  language  wherein 
my  life  as  physical  man  was  spent. 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS 

Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  Dimetric  (used  in  last  lesson)? 
Is  it  anything  like  is  used  upon  the  earth  that  has  the  same 
name? 

A.  Certainly  not,  and  it  has  never  been  used  upon  the 
earth.  But  that  is  the  name  of  the  force. 

Q.    What  does  Dimetric  mean  in  spirit? 

A.     It  means  the  force  available. 

135 


LESSON  XIV 

THE  UNITY  OP  MY  THOUGHT  AND 

YOURS  WITH  REGARD  TO 

IMMENSITY. 

MARCUS— May  6,  1920 

What  shall  I  say  unto  thee  or  how  can  I  place  for  thee 
clearly  the  great  thought  wherein  I  have  striven  to  give 
and  to  show  you  what  holds  within  Immensity  the  bond 
that  connects  all  things,  yet  I  have  always  felt  in  coming 
close  enough  to  the  earth  that  I  would  teach  them  that 
which  belonged  within  Immensity,  that  which  was  held 
within  Immensity,  that  would  prove  to  them  that  their 
earth  was  not  all  that  had  been  created,  neither  was  the 
earth  all  that  could  be  used.  I  as  spirit  entered  Im- 
mensity and  it  unfolded  itself,  spirit  findeth  here  and  there 
within  it  greater  things,  greater  conditions. 

One  of  them  which  holds  for  me  a  beautiful  memory  of 
earth  is  this:  that  when  spirit  comes  to  earth  and  uses 
the  physical  and  the  mental  of  what  you  call  man,  it  oft- 
times  creates  what  are  known  as  great  ideals  or  great 
thoughts.  If,  after  they  have  passed  through  the  Uni- 
verse of  Thought,  they  find  a  place  within  Immensity, 
and  in  their  purified  condition,  can  be  used  again  by  that 
spirit  as  it  enters  Immensity  and  finds  within  it  that 
which  was  begun  upon  earth,  it  reaches  a  finality  within 
that  condition  which  is  known  as  Immensity. 

136 


Why  does  spirit  strive  to  teach  and  to  bring  close 
enough  to  the  mind  of  man  this  thought?  Why  does  Im- 
mensity, as  we  look  here,  there  and  everywhere,  seem  to 
us  so  much  like  the  cells  of  the  brain  of  man?  Not  that 
it  is  formed  like  it,  but  yet  we  often  find  here  and  there 
that  which  reminds  us  of  the  great  storehouse  that  man 
calls  brain. 

Immensity  for  us  is  the  wonderful  plane  over  which 
we  travel,  meeting  here  and  there  masters  who  answer 
to  us.  Even  within  Immensity  do  we  find  those  who  hold 
great  happiness,  the  happiness  without  alloy,  and  it  is  so 
full  that  ofttimes  as  we  leave  it  and  come  to  the  earth  we 
love  to  bring  a  portion  with  us.  For  why  should  the 
earth  not  be  joyous?  Why  should  not  they  who  are 
within  it  and  serve  within  it  feel  the  influence  of  that 
joyousness? 

This  brings  me  to  the  place  with  thee  where  I  must 
close,  as  it  were,  a  portion  of  my  earth  work.  Here  it  is 
where  I  stop  long  enough  as  I  enter  earth's  environments 
and  strive  to  realize  that  I  have  brought  so  close  to  com- 
rade and  friends  everywhere  something  of  the  knowledge 
of  Immensity.  If  man  questions  unreasonably  and  strives 
to  tell  unto  himself,  even  if  not  to  others,  this  thought, 
"there  can  be  no  such  thing,"  "there  can  exist  naught  that 
is  perfectly  real  save  the  earth,"  and  yet  we  know  as  spirit 
that  man  is  not  satisfied  to  remain  inanimate,  that  he 
must  seek  out  that  which  shall  show  him  the  way  we  live 
is  eternal,  the  truth  of  the  Infinite  is  so  pure  that  it  must 
always  live. 

If  I  began  at  the  beginning,  tracing  out  my  comings 
and  goings  from  Immensity  to  earth,  many  and  long 
would  be  the  voyages  according  as  I  would  give  it  thee 
and  place  it  for  thee  that  thou  couldst  understand. 

Ofttimes  I  have  those  whom  I  have  never  met  before, 
yet  there  is  that  bond  between  spirit  that  is  always  true, 

137 


always  perfect,  without  the  shadow  of  aught  between. 
I  am  not  weary  of  earth,  and  if  it  is  the  Father's  wish  I 
shall  return  unto  it,  I  shall  bring  to  it  all  that  is  given 
me  for  it  and  if  I  am  given  the  building  of  a  wall  I  will 
make  it  perfect.  If  I  am  called  into  its  formless  condi- 
tion I  shall  still  bring  something  as  a  worthy  gift.  To 
me  has  been  given  the  right  to  do  these  things ;  to  me  it 
will  give  a  sweet,  perfect  and  joyous  worthiness  that 
when  I  prepare  my  gift,  it  shall  be  mine  to  give. 

I  have  told  you  of  many  things,  they  have  not  been  in 
fragments,  they  have  been  straight,  clear  and  builded  firm. 
Thou,  even  thou,  hath  waited  with  me  to  find  thy  way 
into  the  many  places.  Once  in  a  while  thy  spirit  hath 
gone  with  me  into  Immensity  but  the  human  body  was 
not  able  to  retain  a  memory  of  it.  The  keen  sense  of  the 
soul  had  not  attuned  itself  close  enough  that  thou  couldst 
call  it  forth,  yet  thy  spirit  hath  held  it ;  and  it  hath  been 
perfect  between  us,  a  bond  that  hath  never  been  broken 
ffom  the  beginning,  never  will  be  broken  as  long  as  we  as 
spirit  are,  and  that,  thou  knowest,  is  forever. 

Once  in  a  while  I  have  sought  out  in  the  places  of 
earth  that  I  might  leave  an  impression  of  Immensity,  I 
have  found  here  and  there  many  who  seem  waiting  to 
have  a  knowledge,  yet  ofttimes  it  has  been  difficult  to 
express  to  them  in  a  spirit's  way  what  they  were  asking 
for. 

To  me  as  spirit,  as  I  have  gone  my  way,  I  have  found 
great  and  wondrous  are  the  works  of  that  which  has  first 
held  a  consciousness  for  me  and  I  have  many  times  lis- 
tened and  caught  through  the  voice  of  spirit,  still  greater, 
still  greater ;  and  it  hath  come  to  me  and  it  hath  soothed 
and  rested  me.  If  thou  shouldst  find  thy  way  again  into 
Immensity  and  I  was  not  with  thee,  I  have  there  tidings 
for  thee,  I  have  left  for  thee  that  which  shall  guide  and 
direct  thee  in  many  of  thy  ways,  and  thou  wilt  know 

138 


that  it  is  I,  for  I  have  left  for  thee  the  symbol  of  my  name 
and  thou  wilt  read  it  and  it  shall  be  this :  "A  greeting  and 
a  joyous  thought."  Thou  wilt  call  to  mind,  even  as  spirit, 
that  which  thou  and  I  have  held  within  the  earth.  Fear 
not  to  make  thy  way  within  Immensity  for  thou  wilt 
easily  learn  that  which  is,  that  thou  hast  made  and  lifted 
thy  consciousness  high  enough,  strong  enough  and  clear 
enough  to  understand.  I  say  unto  thee  that  thou  wilt 
have  no  need  to  falter  in  thy  earth's  travels;  thou  wilt 
have  no  need  to  leave  undone  anything,  for  thou  wilt 
find  that  thou  knowest  from  time  to  time  what  thy  work 
shall  be. 

I,  as  spirit,  am  glad  that  I  have  found  within  Im- 
mensity for  thee  nothing  that  thou  couldst  not  know; 
nothing  that  thy  spirit  could  not  penetrate  into. 

One  of  the  greater  conditions  that  thou  wilt  find  as 
thou  goest  as  spirit  into  Immensity  is  that  thou  wilt  learn 
that  which  thou  canst  not  repeat  to  man.  This  will  show 
thee  how  ofttimes  in  giving  thee  a  knowledge  I  had  no 
words  that  would  tell  it  unto  thee. 

If  thou  wouldst  ask  me  who  hath  created  all  within 
Immensity  I  would  say  unto  thee,  many  were  they  who 
have  placed  it  together,  not  one,  but  many.  As  far  as  I 
could  penetrate  I  still  find  many  who  are  placing  greater 
things  within  it.  In  thy  thought  as  thou  dost  think  of  it, 
never  forget,  always  know,  that  it  is  large  enough,  great 
enough,  strong  enough,  to  bear  and  to  hold  everything 
that  is  needful  to  be  placed  within  it. 

Many  times  in  coming  unto  thee  I  have  seemed  to  feel 
as  if  I  would  be  glad  when  thy  earth  filled  its  place  within 
it;  when  all  was  complete.  For  unto  me  was  born  long 
ago  the  fullness  and  the  joy  of  the  great  eternal  ways. 
So  it  will  be  unto  thee.  Once  in  a  while  as  thou  dost 
come  close  thou  hast  felt  it  yet  thou  couldst  not  be  per- 

139 


fectly  free  until  thy  physical  had  passed  away  and  left 
thee  with  a  soul-body  all  thine  own. 

I  say  unto  thee  I  shall  go  my  way  and  many  are  they 
who  will  go  with  me  as  we  find  there  are  masters  from 
the  Universes  who  are  to  be  with  us;  some  of  them  will 
remain  only  a  short  time,  and  then  take  up  their  work 
within  the  earth. 

Choose  that  thou  shalt  ever  more  hold  our  lives  to- 
gether, both  in  the  Universe  and  in  the  Earth  as  a  com- 
pleteness that  the  Father  gave  us  to  hold. 

This,  I  would  say  unto  thee,  will  form  for  a  time  only 
a  portion  of  greater  knowledge  that  will  be  given,  but  its 
portion  will  be  twixt  thee  and  me. 

Thou  art  seeking  a  new  law,  thou  art  placing  thyself 
that  thou  mightest  become  more  conscious.  That  is  wise, 
yet  in  seeking  it  do  not  forget  to  take  others  with  thee, 
and  if  thou  hast  to  wait  a  little  for  them,  it  matters  not, 
for  all  must  serve  and  even  as  thou  knowest  I  have  oft- 
times  stopped  long  enough,  as  spirit,  to  guide  one  toward 
the  water  showing  itself  over  the  low  stones,  that  they 
might  go  within  it  and  bathe  their  feet  and  become  rested. 
Thou  as  human  can  ofttimes  give  unto  them  a  word  of 
knowledge  that  will  rest  them  as  they  go  their  way 
through  earth  and  into  the  life  of  the  spirit ;  and  as  thou 
dost  think  of  them  thou  must  remember  they  knowest  not 
spirit.  Glad  I  am  that  I  have  been  able  to  place  for  thee 
this  knowledge  of  Immensity,  simple  and  plain,  yet  ever 
full  of  the  words  that  make  it  a  real  and  perfect  condi- 
tion. 


140 


YB   13280 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


